CITY OF MIAMI - · PDF fileCITY OF MIAMI CAPITAL IMPROVEMENTS ... comply with the most stringent requirement. ... Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800

CITY OF MIAMI CAPITAL IMPROVEMENTS

PROGRAM

PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR

RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS AT

MAXIMO GOMEZ (DOMINO) PARK CIP Project No. B-35861A

October 30, 2008

Wolfberg Alvarez & PartnersArchitecture � Engineering � Planning � Interiors

April 28, 2011

COM – RESTROOM IMPROVEMENTS – MAXIMO GOMEZ PARKARCHITECT WOLFBERG ALVAREZ & PARTNERS PROJECT NO. Project No. 27036.00 Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 0 - BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTSSection 00800 INDEX OF DRAWINGS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01420 REFERENCES Section 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Section 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS Section 01730 CUTTING AND PATCHING

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK

Section 02821 CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES (INTERIOR APPLICATION) Section 02832 STEEL FENCES AND GATES

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

Section 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK Section 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

Section 04820 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 5 - METALS

Section 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 6 – WOODS AND PLASTICS

Section 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 07321 CLAY ROOF TILES Section 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07920 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS

Section 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08710 FINISH HARDWARE


TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

Section 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER Section 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Section 09310 CERAMIC TILE Section 09912 PAINTING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

Section 10431 SIGNAGE

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

N/A

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

N/A

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

N/A

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS

N/A

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

Section 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Section 15023 CODES AND STANDARDS Section 15047 IDENTIFICATION Section 15100 VALVES, COCKS AND FAUCETS (PLUMBING)Section 15260 THERMAL INSULATION (PLUMBING) Section 15410 PIPING (PLUMBING) Section 15421 DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS Section 15430 PIPING SPECIALTIES (PLUMBING) Section 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM AND SUPPORTSSection 15457 WATER HEATERS Section 15820 AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT Section 15840 DUCTWORK Section 15860 DUCT ACCESSORIES


TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

Section 16023 CODES AND STANDARDS Section 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Section 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES Section 16140 WIRING DEVICES Section 16476 DISCONNECTS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Section 16491 FUSES Section 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING Section 16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

REFERENCES 01420 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board (800) 872-2253 www.access-board.gov (202) 272-5434 CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office (888) 293-6498 www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr (202) 512-1530


CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement Available from Army Corps of Engineers Waterways Experiment Station (601) 634-2355 www.wes.army.mil DOD Department of Defense Specifications and Standards Available from Defense Automated Printing Service (215) 697-6257 //astimage.daps.dla.mil/online FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification Available from Defense Automated Printing Service (215) 697-6257 //astimage.daps.dla.mil/online Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.fss.gsa.gov/pub/fed-specs.cfm Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.nibs.org FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards Available from Defense Automated Printing Service (215) 697-6257 //astimage.daps.dla.mil/online UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board (800) 872-2253 www.access-board.gov (202) 272-5434

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862-5100 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com


AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AAN American Association of Nurserymen (See ANLA) AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.aashto.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI American Concrete Institute/ACI International (248) 848-3700 www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org ADC Air Diffusion Council (312) 201-0101 www.flexibleduct.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AFPA American Forest & Paper Association (See AF&PA) AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHA American Hardboard Association (847) 934-8800 www.ahardbd.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (202) 626-7300 www.e-architect.com


AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALA American Laminators Association (See LMA) ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800) 395-2522 www.alca.org (703) 736-9666 ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee (301) 972-1700 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANLA American Nursery & Landscape Association (202) 789-2900 (Formerly: AAN - American Association of Nurserymen) www.anla.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts (402) 476-3852 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (941) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ASCA Architectural Spray Coaters Association (609) 848-6120 www.ascassoc.com ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers


www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (212) 591-7722 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials (610) 832-9585 www.astm.org AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300 (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCMA) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (817) 326-6300 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CCFSS Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures (573) 341-4471 www.umr.edu/~ccfss CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200


CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 www.canelect.ca CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 412-0900 www.cganet.com CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (819) 956-0425 www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 (Formerly: National Particleboard Association) www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSA CSA International (800) 463-6727 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org


DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA/TIA Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry (703) 907-7500 Association www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eifsfacts.com (770) 968-7945 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org FCI Fluid Controls Institute (216) 241-7333 www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association (See GANA) FM Factory Mutual System (See FMG) FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 (Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association) www.glasswebsite.com/gana GRI Geosynthetic Research Institute (215) 895-2343 www.drexel.edu/gri GTA Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of North America (See GANA) HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org


HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAS International Approval Services (See CSA International) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (508) 394-4424 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute (The) (703) 450-0116 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com IRI Industrial Risk Insurers (800) 243-8308 www.industrialrisk.com (860) 520-7300 ITS Intertek Testing Services (800) 345-3851 www.itsglobal.com (607) 753-6711 IWS Insect Screening Weavers Association (Now defunct) KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LGSI Light Gage Structural Institute (972) 370-0967 www.loseke.com LMA Laminating Materials Association (201) 664-2700 (Formerly: ALA - American Laminators Association) www.lma.org LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (847) 577-7200 LSGA Laminated Safety Glass Association


(See GANA) MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MCA Metal Construction Association (312) 201-0193 www.metalconstruction.org MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 MGPHO Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization, Inc. (877) 238-5157 www.mgpho.org (913) 681-6548 MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (614) 228-6194 www.marble-institute.com ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (See SSMA) MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NAAMM North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers (See GANA) NACE NACE International (281) 228-6200 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 (The) www.naima.org NAMI National Accreditation and Management Institute, Inc. (304) 258-5100 NAPM National Association of Photographic Manufacturers (See PIMA) NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com


NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (414) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable Television Association (202) 775-3669 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441 www.netaworld.org NFPA National Fire Protection Association (800) 344-3555 www.nfpa.org (617) 770-3000 NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-6372 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (703) 442-4890 www.glass.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 www.nofma.org NPA National Particleboard Association (See CPA) NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400


NSA National Stone Association (800) 342-1415 www.aggregates.org (703) 525-8788 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (703) 779-1022 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (703) 359-0826 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (508) 230-3516 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 //pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PIMA Photographic & Imaging Manufacturers Association (914) 698-7603 (Formerly: NAPM - National Association of Photographic Manufacturers) www.pima.net RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (Contact by mail only) RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association (800) 220-7620 www.rma.org (202) 682-4800 SAE SAE International (724) 776-4841 www.sae.org SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462-1930 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org


SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (843) 689-6878 www.sefalabfurn.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.sigmaonline.org/sigma SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org SPI The Society of the Plastics Industry (202) 974-5200 www.plasticsindustry.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPI/SPFD The Society of the Plastics Industry Spray Polyurethane Foam Division (See SPFA) SPRI SPRI (781) 444-0242 (Single Ply Roofing Institute) www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSMA Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (312) 456-5590 (Formerly: ML/SFA - Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association) www.ssma.com SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (800) 837-8303 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333


www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries (703) 907-7700 Alliance www.tiaonline.org TPI Truss Plate Institute (608) 833-5900 TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 705-9898 UFAC Upholstered Furniture Action Council (336) 885-5065 www.ufac.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 704-4050 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 www.culturenet.ca/usitt (315) 463-6463 USP U.S. Pharmacopeia (800) 822-8772 www.usp.org (301) 881-0666 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (800) 506-4653 (Formerly: AWCMA - American Window Covering (212) 661-4261 Manufacturers Association) www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and (847) 299-5200 Door Association) www.wdma.com WIC Woodwork Institute of California (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org


WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (708) 799-2300 www.bocai.org CABO Council of American Building Officials (See ICC) IAPM

O International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical (909) 595-8449

Officials (The) www.iapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (800) 284-4406 www.icbo.org (562) 699-0541 ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533 (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.intlcode.org SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (205) 591-1853 www.sbcci.org

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-0990 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.doc.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 260-2090 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (202) 366-4000


www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (202) 418-0190 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (202) 708-5082 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory (See LBNL) LBNL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-5605 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (202) 693-1999 www.osha.gov RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01420

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Sewers and drainage. 2. Water service and distribution. 3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities. 4. Ventilation. 5. Electric power service. 6. Lighting. 7. Telephone service.

C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Field offices. 2. Storage and fabrication sheds. 3. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.

D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Environmental protection. 2. Pest control. 3. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.

E. Related Sections include the following:

1. General terms and conditions. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for

products in those Sections.

1.03 USE CHARGES

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Owner's construction forces.


2. Architect. 3. Testing agencies. 4. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.

1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.

2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service.

1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work:

1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended.

B. Water: Potable.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended.


B. Field Offices: Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes; air conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading.

C. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.

D. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized drinking-water units, including paper cup supply.

E. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light.

F. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations.

1. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully.

1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.

2. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly.

3. Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use.


1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site. 2. Provide distribution piping. Space outlets so water can be reached with a 100-foot hose.

Provide one hose at each outlet. 3. Provide a minimum of 30-psi static pressure at furthest point.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material.

2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel.

a. Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for convenience, safety, and sanitation of personnel.

3. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units.

E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

F. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear.

1. Install electric power service underground, unless overhead service must be used. 2. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage.

G. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment.

1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio.

2. Provide 4-gang outlets, spaced so 100-foot extension cord can reach each area for power hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V ac, 20-A circuit for each outlet.

H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

2. Install exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations, traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed.


3. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate telephone line for each field office.

1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office.

3.03 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access.

2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.

3. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weather tight, air-conditioned field office for use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings of ten (10) persons at Project site. Keep office clean and orderly.

1. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

a. Desk and four chairs, four-drawer file cabinet, a plan table (3’x8’ min.), a plan rack, and bookcase.

b. Water cooler and private toilet complete with water closet, lavatory, and medicine cabinet with mirror.

c. Coffee machine and supplies, including regular and decaffeinated coffee, filters, cups, stirring sticks, creamer, sugar, and sugar substitute.

2. Provide an air-conditioning unit capable of maintaining an indoor temperature of 72 deg F. 3. Provide fluorescent light fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk

height. Provide 110- to 120-V duplex outlets spaced at not more than 12-foot intervals, 1 per wall in each room.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on-site.

3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION


A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site.

B. Pest Control: Retain a local exterminator or pest-control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Engage this pest-control service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

C. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.

3.05 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures."


EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. General Terms and conditions for submitting surveys.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location and dimensions of utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:


a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation.4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to

be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation."

3.03 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the existing improvements. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a professional land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.

C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.


D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.04 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produces harmful noise levels.

F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.


3.06 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire

work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.

1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.


K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.07 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section 01400 "Quality Requirements."

3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work, including work performed under separate contracts is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.09 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.


CUTTING AND PATCHING 01730 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 01730 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.


1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: If not specifically shown on the drawings, submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and

patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.

7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.



A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio or in any manner not specifically shown on the contract documents.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following:

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 4. Control systems. 5. Communication systems. 6. Electrical wiring systems.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following:

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 5. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

3.03 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.


1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete, Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-

core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections

where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. c. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats

over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

3. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

4. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.


CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 02821- 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 02821 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 REFERENCES AND CODES

A. Florida Building Code (FBC).

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:

1. A121-92a Specification for Zinc-coated (Galvanized) Barbed Wire. 2. A123-89a Specification for Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products. 3. A392-96 Specification for Zinc-coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric. 4. A569/A Specification for Steel, Carbon, Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip

Commercial Quality. 5. B6-95a Specification for Zinc. 6. F1083-96 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-dipped Zinc-coated Welded, for

Fence Structures.


A. Products made of aluminum, aluminized, or otherwise treated with aluminum to any significant extent shall not be used.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit complete shop drawings for each rolling gate for approval before fabrication.

1.05 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Security:

1. At the beginning and before the end of the work day, project site shall have all safety hazards removed or isolated by mesh type barricades creating a continuous fence perimeter.

2. At the Owner's discretion, when a continuous perimeter fence cannot be maintained, Contractor shall provide a properly licensed security guard until a continuous fence perimeter is restored.

1.06 WARRANTY


A. Warrant for 1 year after substantial completion. Apply warranty to materials, quality of work, and hardware. Work, material, and hardware shall be free from defects and structurally sound during the warranty period. Defective material, improper work, and other substandard conditions documented by the Owner within the warranty period shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Chain Link Fences and Gates:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit, Fence Division. 2. Cyclone Fence Division of USX Corp. 3. Reeves Southeastern Corp.

B. Gate Hardware:

1. Hinges:

a. Semmerling Manufacturing, No.'s 1746, 1747, and 1748. b. Southeastern Wire, No.'s 422405, 422406, and 422407.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Fence posts shall comply with one of the following:

1. Type 1 ASTM F1083 steel, schedule 40 pipe, hot dipped galvanized after forming according to ASTM A123 with galvanized coating weighing 1.8 oz. per sq.ft. minimum.

2. Cold-rolled steel complying with ASTM A569/A, hot-dipped galvanized with a minimum of 1.0 oz/sq.ft. of ASTM B6 high grade and special grade zinc, a chromate conversion coating weighing a minimum of 30 micrograms/sq.in. and a clear organic coating 0.5 mills thick.

B. Size posts according to the following:

1. 4' Height:

a. Line Posts:

1) Pipe size: 2 inches NOM. 2) Wall thickness: 0.145". 3) Spacing O.C.: 10 feet. 4) Footing depth: 2'-0".

b. Corner, End, and Pull Posts:

1) Pipe size: 3" NOM. 2) Wall thickness: 0.203".


3) Footing depth: 3'-0".

2. 6',8',10',and 12' Heights:

a. Line Posts:

1) Pipe size: 2.5" NOM. 2) Wall thickness: 0.154". 3) Spacing O.C.: 10 feet. 4) Footing depth: 2'-6".

b. Corner, End, and Pull Posts.

1) Pipe size: 4.0" NOM. 2) Wall thickness: 0.226". 3) Footing depth: 3'-0".

C. Provide tops for posts to exclude moisture.

1. Loop Top: Provide on line posts. 2. Dome Top: Provide on corner, end, pull, and gate posts.

D. Bracing: Install horizontal bracing at every end, corner, gate, and pull post. Bracing shall be 1-5/8" outside diameter, approximately 2.27 lb. per foot, hot dipped galvanized steel pipe complete with hot dip galvanized truss rods, turnbuckles, bolts, washers, and nuts. Braces shall be Type 1, ASTM F1083 steel schedule 40 pipe, hot dipped galvanized after forming according to ASTM A123 with galvanized coating weighing 1.8 oz. per sq.ft. minimum.

E. Top and Bottom Rail: Install to run continuously between line, corner, gate, pull, and end posts at permanent fencing fences. Railing shall be 1-5/8" outside diameter 2.27 lb. per foot (minimum wt.) hot dip galvanized steel pipe on all fences. Top and bottom rail shall be Type 1 ASTM F1083 steel schedule 40 pipe, is hot dipped galvanized after forming according to ASTM A123 with galvanized coating weighing 1.8 oz. per sq.ft. minimum.

F. Mid-Rail:

1. Install to run continuously between line, corner, gate, pull, and end posts. Railing shall be 1-5/8" outside diameter 2.27 lb. per foot (approx. wt.) hot dip galvanized steel pipe. Mid rail shall be Type 1 ASTM F1083 steel schedule 40 pipe, hot dipped galvanized after forming according to ASTM A123 with galvanized coating weighing 1.8 oz. per. sq.ft. minimum.

2. Install mid-rail on all fences 8 feet high or greater. Install mid-rail at the 1/2 way point on the fence and be level and consistent the entire length of the fence.

G. Fabric and Fastenings:

1. Fabric: Chain linked, No.9 gage, steel wire, hot dip galvanized after weaving, complying with ASTM A392, Class 2, woven in 2 inch mesh with top and bottom selvage knuckled for 4 foot and 6 foot fabric. 8 foot, 10 foot, and 12 foot fabric shall have top and bottom selvages knuckled.


2. Fabric Tie Wire: No.9 gage, steel alloy wire ties, galvanized, for attachment to line posts.

a. Tie at centers not exceeding 14 inches on line posts, and 24 inches on horizontal rails.

3. Stretcher Bars:

a. 3/16" x 3/4" minimum hot dip galvanized steel, two inches shorter than full height of fabric.

b. Provide one stretcher bar for each gate post and end post and two bars for each corner or pull post.

4. Bands, Ties, and Clips:

a. At Line Posts:

1) No.9 gage, steel alloy, galvanized, tie wire. 2) Tie fabric to line posts at top, bottom, and intermediately at 14 inch

centers.

b. At End, Corner, Pull, and Gate Posts:

1) Galvanized steel bands attaching fabric and stretcher bars to posts. 2) Locate bands at top, bottom, and intermediately at 14 inch centers.

c. At Top Rails:

1) No.9 gage, steel alloy, galvanized, tie wire. 2) Tie fabric to top rails at 24 inch centers.

H. Individual Gates, All Heights:

1. 3 to 6 feet wide.

a. Pipe Size: 3 inches NOM. b. Hinges: 2 heavy duty industrial. c. Sch 40: 0.203".


a. Pipe Size: 4 inches NOM. b. Hinges: 3 heavy duty industrial. c. Sch 40: 0.226".


a. Pipe Size: 6 inches NOM. b. Hinges: 4 heavy duty industrial. c. Sch 40: 6-5/8" NOM.


I. Gate Framework:

1. Gate frames for all heights shall be 2 inches NOM type 1, 0.145" wall thickness, ASTM F1083 steel schedule 40 pipe, hot dipped galvanized after forming according to ASTM A123, with galvanized coating weighing 1.8 oz. per. sq.ft. minimum.

2. Assemble by welding. 3. Coat all welds with a suitable cold galvanizing compound. 4. Gate heights shall match adjacent fencing, unless specified otherwise. 5. Provide hinges, latches, stops, and keepers. 6. Gates over 4 feet wide must be sufficiently trussed and braced to prevent sagging.

J. Gate Hardware:

1. Hinges: Malleable iron and hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A123. Hinges shall be ball and socket, offset type to allow gates to swing back parallel with the fence line.

2. Latches, all heights:

a. Malleable iron, hot dip galvanized, readily lockable with padlock(s). Padlocks with chains will be provided by the Owner.

b. Latches for single gates, up to 15 feet wide, shall be single gate latch assembly.

3. Latches for double gates in openings 18 feet to 30 feet wide shall be heavy duty, galvanized, malleable iron gate stops with steel pipe sleeves anchored in concrete and arranged to engage plunger of latch at the center(s) of the opening(s). Latch and plunger shall not be removable without tools.

4. Keepers: Construct keeper of rust proof material and which automatically engage the gate leaf and hold it in the open position until manually released.

5. Stops: Hot dip galvanized, set in concrete. 6. Handicapped Accessibility: Provide heavy-duty lever type gate hardware or weatherproof

push bar in place of latches. 7. Miscellaneous Fittings: Malleable iron or pressed steel. Ferrous materials shall be hot

dipped galvanized.

K. Bollards: Type 1 ASTM F1083 steel schedule 40 pipe, hot dipped galvanized after forming according to ASTM A123, with galvanized coating weighing 1.8 oz. per sq.ft. minimum. Construct bollards of galvanized steel, fill with concrete, and place on the traffic side of the fabric unless otherwise specified. Post dimensions for bollards shall be twice the diameter of the end post on the adjacent fence. Likewise, the footer dimensions shall be double the dimensions specified for end posts.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Underground Clearances: Before starting, obtain underground clearances from utility companies, A/E, and site staff to minimize damage to underground piping, cables, or structures.

3.02 INSTALLATION


A. Alignment:

1. Install fencing and gates plumb, level, and aligned with all abutting fencing according to the manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.

2. Top of fabric line shall be straight and level, with the bottom 2 inches above grade + 1 inch.

B. Footings: Provide a stable base for the post, mechanically fixed to the post, and stabilized in the surrounding earth to adequately support the post, fence fabric, and gates.

C. Bracing:

1. Pull post bracing is to be provided every 200 lineal feet of straight fencing to construct the pull post array for proper fabric stretching.

2. Install bracing in both directions from corner and pull posts.

D. Fabric and Fasteners:

1. Hog rings are allowed only as specified by the Owner and be No.12 gage galvanized steel.

2. Attach all stretcher bars by bands and be 2 inches shorter than the fabric and spaced so that there are no protruding ends that can be bent.

3. If these tolerances can not be maintained, Contractor shall contact the Owner immediately by before proceeding.

E. Pointed Surfaces:

1. At non-agricultural educational plants, barbed or purposely sharpened edges are not allowed from the highest grade level up to 6'-0" (minimum) of fence height.

2. Complete minimum height from the highest grade elevation next to the fence line. 3. All fabric and tie wire terminal ends shall be knuckled and turned away from the traffic

side of fences. 4. Assemble all galvanized drip points, bolts, truss rods, posts, and hardware so that they

have their sharp edges directed away from the traffic side of the fence. 5. All hardware including, but not limited to, brace bands, tension bands, and stretcher

turnbuckles shall have rounded edges. 6. Remove hardware with sharp or pointed surfaces or edges and replace at no cost to the

Owner.

F. Gates:

1. All gates next to the building shall open in the direction of building egress and be able to be secured in their open and closed positions.

2. No gate may reduce or restrict a building egress dimension in its open position. 3. Gates shall be installed complete with hinges, latches, keepers, and stops and be level

and plumb in their closed position and locked with an Owner-provided lock. 4. Perimeter fence gates opening on a public sidewalk shall open inward to avoid disrupting

the public right of way.

G. Fence Posts:


1. Install initially above the finished fence height and then cut level throughout the fence line between the corner posts.

2. Install post caps when the footings have been set to prevent the accumulation of moisture in the post.

3. All posts shall be installed level and plumb.

H. Footings:

1. Set posts in 3,000 psi concrete consisting of not less than six bags of cement per cubic yard of sand. Rod or vibrate concrete in earth compacted or water saturated and allowed to settle.

2. Footing diameters shall be not less than four times the diameter of the post. Slope the top of the footing a minimum of 1 inch to the surrounding grade to shed water.

3. When posts are installed in asphalt, pour concrete to 2 inches below grade, slope, and back fill with well-tamped Type I asphaltic concrete to match existing surface.

4. Posts should be set in concrete in its entire underground length from grade level to the recommended depth then raised 6 inches until the concrete has fully cured.

5. Install footings on all posts except for temporary fencing.

I. Fence Removal:

1. Includes the unearthing, disassembly, collection, and disposal of all existing fence posts, fabric, hardware, footers, keepers, stops, and debris accumulated along the fence line.

2. Holes and surface irregularities created by the fence removal shall be filled to prevent tripping hazards.

J. Temporary Fencing:

1. 6'-0" No.11 gage or greater fabric tied to 2 inches or greater driven in posts with No.11 gage steel alloy ties.

2. Gates and gateposts shall be constructed and installed according to the specifications for permanent fencing, except for top, bottom, and mid-rails.

K. Baffles:

1. Double baffles shall be constructed of 2 end posts, 3 line posts, and a fabric panel. 2. Set end posts in the fence line 6 feet apart.

a. One line post shall be set at the mid point between those end posts as a divider. b. The 2 remaining line posts hold the baffle fabric. c. They are set 2 feet inside the fence line 10 feet apart and are connected by top

rail. d. End posts and line posts shall match those specified for the fence line.

3. Construct single baffles of 2 end posts, 2 line posts, and a fabric panel. Set end posts in the fence line 3 feet apart. The 2 line posts hold the baffle fabric. They are set 2 feet inside the fence line 7 feet apart and connected by top rail.

a. End posts and line posts shall match those specified for the fence line.


3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean Up: At the completion of each day's work, remove from the site and premises, all debris, surplus materials, and salvaged fencing not wanted by the Owner.

END OF SECTION

STEEL FENCES AND GATES 02832- 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 02832 - STEEL FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Picket fencing with gates and accessories.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:

1. A500-93 Specification for Cold-formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

2. A513-92 Specification for Electric-resistance-welded Carbon and Alloy Mechanical Tubing.

3. A653-96 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-iron Alloy-coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality.

4. A924-96a Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, metallic-coated by the Hot-dip Process .

5. A1011-02 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability

6. B695-91 Specifications for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts indicating material compliance and specified options.

B. Shop drawings: Layout of fence and gates with dimensions, details, and finishes of component accessories and post foundations prepared by a Florida Registered Engineer, signed and sealed.

C. Samples: Color sections for polyester finishes. If requested, samples of materials for finials, caps, and accessories.


A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience manufacturing steel gates.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Custom Ornamental Steel Gates

1. Any manufacturer specializing in gates similar to the design shown herein.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Ornamental Picket Fence:

1. Style and heights as shown on drawings. 2. Pickets:

a. Square tubular members. b. Minimum Size Pickets: 1 inch. c. Picket Spacing: 3-15/16" maximum face to face. d. Thickness: 14 gauge. e. Attach each picket to each rail with #4 - 1/4" industrial drive rivets or weld (touch-

up galvanization after welding).

3. Rails:

a. Square tubular members formed from hot-rolled structural steel. b. Size: 3" wide x 1-1/2" deep. c. Wall Thickness: 11 gauge. d. Punch rails to receive pickets and rivets and attach rails to all brackets with 2

each, 1/4" industrial drive rivets or weld (touch-up galvanization after welding).

4. Posts:

a. Square tubular members. b. Minimum Post Size: 3 inches x 3 inches. c. Wall Thickness: 12 gauge.

5. Finish:

a. Steel material, galvanized after forming shall comply with ASTM A1011 with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi. The exterior shall be hot dipped galvanized with a 0.45 oz/sq.ft. Minimum zinc weight. The interior surface shall be coated with a minimum 81 percent nominal zinc pigmented coating 0.3 mils minimum thickness.

b. Steel material, galvanized before forming, shall comply with ASTM A924 with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi and have G90 hot dipped galvanized coating according to ASTM A653.

c. After steel components have been galvanized, clean and prepare surfaces of components to assure complete adhesion of finish coat.

d. Apply 2.5 mil thickness of polyester resin based powder coating by electrostatic


spray process. e. Bake finish for 20 minutes at 450 degrees F (232 degrees C) metal temperature.

B. Accessories:

1. Rail Attachment Brackets:

a. Die cast of zinc (Zamak #3 Alloy). b. Ball and socket design capable of 30 degrees swivel (up/down-left/right). c. Bracket to fully encapsulate rail end for complete security.

2. Industrial Drive Rivets:

a. Of sufficient length to attach items in a secure non-rattling position. b. Rivet with minimum of 1,100 lbs. holding power and shear strength of 1,500 lbs.

3. Ornamental Steel Gate Accessories:

a. Provide indicated items required to complete gate system. b. Galvanize each ferrous metal item according to ASTM B695 and finish to match

framing.

4. Picket Tops: Square edged or rounded. Points are not allowed.

C. Setting Material:

1. Concrete: Minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3,000 psi. 2. Flanged Posts: Provide flange type base plates with 4 holes for surface mounting of

posts where indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION A.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install gates according to manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Gate Posts and hardware: Set keepers, stops, sleeves and other accessories into concrete.

C. Surface mount (wall mount) posts with mounting plates where indicated. Fasten with lag bolts and shields.

D. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and maintain in position during placement and finishing operation.

3.03 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates plumb, level and secure for full opening without interference.


B. Attach hardware with tamper resistant fasteners.

C. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

3.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Install post caps and other accessories to complete fence.

B. Clean up debris and unused material and remove from site.

END OF SECTION

CONCRETE FORMWORK 03100 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work covered by this Section of the specifications consists of furnishing all materials, labor, services, and equipment required to form all cast-in-place concrete shown on the drawings including but not limited to all slabs, beams, columns, walls, stairs and equipment pads.


A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for quality control including workmanship and materials furnished by subcontractors and suppliers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Formwork Drawings: Formwork drawings, prepared under the supervision and signed, dated, and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida, shall be submitted for Owner's record and shall be reviewed by the Engineer-of-Record for conformance to structural drawing layout only. Such shop drawings shall indicate types of materials, sizes, lengths, connection details, design allowance for construction loads, anchors, form ties, shores, braces, construction joints, reveals, camber, openings, formwork coatings and all other pertinent information as specified in ACI 347.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The publications listed below (codes and standards) form part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" 2. ACI 318-05 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute "Reinforced Concrete, Manual of Standard Practice" 4. ACI SP-4 "Formwork for Concrete"

B. In addition, all formwork shall be designed, erected, supported, braced, and maintained according to ACI Standard 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork".

1.5 RESPONSIBILITY

A. The design, construction and safety of all formwork shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. All forms, shores, backshores, false work, bracing, and other temporary supports shall be engineered to support all loads imposed including the wet weight of concrete, construction equipment, live loads, lateral loads due to wind and wet concrete imbalance. The Contractor shall also be responsible for determining when temporary supports, shores, backshores, and other bracing may be safely removed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1 FORMS FOR EXPOSED FINISHED CONCRETE

A. Unless otherwise specified formwork for exposed concrete surfaces shall consist of plywood; metal, metal framed plywood, or other acceptable surface. Formwork shall provide a continuous straight and smooth surface conforming to the joint system as specified on the Architectural drawings. Form material shall have sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of concrete without bow or deflection. Plywood shall be overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "A-C or B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form", Class I, or plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood", Class I, Exterior Grade or better, Mill-oiled and edge sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark.

2.2 FORMS FOR UNEXPOSED FINISH CONCRETE

A. Unless otherwise specified, formwork for unexposed concrete surfaces shall be constructed with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Lumber shall be dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

2.3 FORMWORK COATINGS

A. Formwork coatings shall be a commercial formulation that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces or impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede curing with water or curing compound.

2.4 NAILS AND FASTENERS

A. Use only galvanized nails and fasteners for securing formwork in structures exposed to weather or unconditioned spaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347.

B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.

C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate

alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.

D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom


forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal.

E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and patch forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous location.

F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer

strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.

G. Form ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap off metal form ties, designated to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. Unless otherwise indicated, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is 1 1/2" inside concrete and will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. Provide only galvanized form ties in structures exposed to weather or unconditioned spaces.

H. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trade providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

3.2 CLEANING AND TIGHTENING

A. Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt and all other debris just prior to concrete placement. Retighten forms and bracing prior to concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

3.3 CLEANING AND RE-USE OF FORMS

A. Forms reused in the work shall be repaired and cleaned. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged facing material shall not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Forms intended for successive concrete placement shall have surfaces cleaned, fins and laitance removed, and joints tightened to avoid surface offsets. New form coating compound shall be applied to reused forms. Thin form coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of form coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Unless specified otherwise, all tolerances for concrete formwork shall conform to ACI Standard 117, "Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials". Before concrete placement the Contractor shall check lines and levels of erected formwork and make any corrections and adjustments as required to ensure proper size and location of concrete members and stability of forming systems. During concrete placement the Contractor shall check formwork and supports to ensure that forms have not displaced and that completed work will be within specified tolerances.

3.5 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS


A. Determination by Contractor’s Registered Engineer: The Contractor’s registered engineer shall determine and submit for record the time and sequence of formwork and shore removal subject to the criteria as specified below.

B. Curing and Stripping Concrete Cylinders: The Contractor shall be responsible for making and curing stripping concrete cylinders, cured under field conditions, for the purpose of determining concrete strength at time of form and shore removal.

C. Records of Weather Conditions: The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping records of

weather conditions to be used in the decision on when to remove forms.

D. Formwork Not Supporting Concrete: Formwork not supporting concrete such as sides of beams, walls, columns and similar parts of the structure, may be 50o F for 12 hours after placing concrete, provided the concrete is sufficiently hard so as not to be damaged by form removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. If ambient air temperatures remain below 50o F or if retarding agents are used, then this specified minimum period should be increased as required to safely remove the forms without damage to the concrete. Where such forms also support formwork for slab or beam soffits, the removal times of the latter shall govern.

E. Formwork Supporting Weight of Concrete: Formwork supporting weight of concrete such as beam soffits, slabs and other structural elements shall not be removed until concrete has attained at least 75% of the design minimum 28-day compressive strength.

END OF SECTION

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03200 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work covered by this Section of the specifications consists of furnishing all materials, labor, hardware, equipment, transportation and services required to fabricate and place all reinforcement for all cast-in-place concrete including bars, welded wire fabric, ties and supports shown on the drawings and as specified.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division One of these specifications.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall show arrangement and layout, bending and assembly diagrams, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, splicing and laps of bars and shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315 Standards.

B. Mill Certificates: Submit mill certificates for all reinforcement signed by Contractor and producer.

1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Perform all tests and inspections as specified in these Specifications.



1. ACI SP-66 “ACI Detailing Manual” 2. ACI 318-05 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute "Reinforced Concrete, Manual of Standard Practice" 4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Placing Reinforcing Bars”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS


A. Reinforcement:

1. Reinforcing Steel: All reinforcing steel shall conform to the "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A615 Grade 60. All reinforcing steel required to be welded shall conform to ASTM A706 "Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement".

2. Galvanized Reinforcing Steel: Provide galvanized reinforcing bars according to ASTM A767 Class II (2.0 Oz. zinc per square foot), hot dipped galvanized after fabrication and bending at locations indicated on the drawings.

3. Deformed Bar Anchors: Deformed bar anchors shall conform to "Specification for Deformed Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A496 with a minimum yield strength of 75,000 PSI. Standard ASTM A615 Grade 60 or Grade 40 reinforcing bars may not be substituted for deformed bar anchors.

4. Welded Wire Fabric: Welded smooth wire fabric for concrete reinforcement shall conform to "Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A185 with yield strength of 65,000 PSI. All welded wire fabric shall be furnished in flat sheets only.

5. Wire: Smooth wire for spiral reinforcement shall conform to "Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A82 with a minimum yield strength of 70,000 PSI.

6. Tie Wire: Tie wire shall be annealed steel tie wire, minimum 16 gauge. Provide only plastic coated or stainless steel tie wire in exposed concrete structures.

B. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations.

1. Exposed to View Concrete: Provide supports with legs which are plastic protected (CRSI

Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI Class 2).

2.2 SPLICES

A. Splice Type and Lap Lengths: Required splice type and lap lengths are defined on the drawings. Lap splice lengths for unscheduled bars not shown otherwise on the drawings shall be 30 bar diameters minimum.

B. Dowel Bar Replacement: Reinforcing steel bars shown on the drawings crossing concrete construction joint surfaces may be formed with inserts cast flush against the form and have dowels connected to the insert in a subsequent concrete pour. This connection shall conform to the following:

1. Splice connection at insert shall develop the full tensile capacity of the reinforcing steel. 2. Inserts shall be one of the following:

a. "Lenton Form Saver", tapered threaded dowel and insert as manufactured by Erico Products, Inc.

b. "Dowel Bar Splicer", dowel bar substitution and rebar splice system (DB-SAE Splicer) as manufactured by Richmond Screw Anchor Co., Inc.


PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION AND DELIVERY

A. Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of indicated sizes and accurately form to shapes and lengths indicated and required, by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Bars with kinks or bends not scheduled shall be rejected.

B. Marking and Shipping: Bundle reinforcement and tag with suitable identification to facilitate sorting and placing. Transport and store at site so as not to damage material. Keep sufficient supply of tested, approved and proper reinforcement at the site to avoid delays. Maintain reinforcing bars free of mud, dirt, grease, or other coating.

3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for placing reinforcing bars, and for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports.

B. Before placing reinforcement and again before concrete is placed, clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork,

construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. Exercise particular care to maintain proper distance and clearance between parallel bars and between bars and forms. Provide metal spreaders and spacers to hold steel in position. Support steel at proper height upon approved chairs.

D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh plus two inches and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Welded wire fabric shall be furnished and placed in flat sheets only.

F. Coordinate with other trades and expedite materials and labor to avoid omissions and delay.

G. Install waterproof membrane or moisture barrier as specified prior to placing steel for concrete slabs-on-grade.

H. Extend reinforcement continuous through construction joints or, if approved on the shop drawings, provide dowels of sufficient length to develop the full tension or compression strength of the bar as applicable.

I. Provide and place additional reinforcing steel at all sleeves and openings in beams, slabs and walls as specified on the drawings. Where reinforcement is interrupted by sleeves or openings


not shown on the drawings, consult with Engineer for instructions for placing and splicing of bars. Provide required additional reinforcing steel at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.3 REINFORCING STEEL SPACING AND COVERAGE

A. Reinforcing steel coverage shall conform to the requirements specified in the General Notes. Cover specified shall be considered minimums that may require increasing where reinforcing steel intersects for different member types. The reinforcing steel detailer shall adjust reinforcing steel cage sizes at intersecting structural members as required to allow clearance for intersecting reinforcing bar layers with minimum specified cover. Cover in structural members not specified in the General Notes shall conform to the requirements of ACI 318-05.

B. Reinforcing Steel Spacing: Except at spirally reinforced or tied compression members, the clear distance between parallel bars in a layer shall not be less than the bar diameter nor 1". Where parallel reinforcement is placed in two or more layers, bars in the upper layer shall be placed directly above bars in the lower layer with clear distance between layers of not less than 1". In spirally reinforced or tied compression members such as columns or walls, the clear distance between longitudinal bars shall be not less than 1.5 times the bar diameter nor 1 1/2".

3.4 SPLICING REINFORCING STEEL

A. Provide splice type (tension lap splice, compression lap splice) as indicated on the drawings. Splice reinforcing bars only at locations shown on the structural drawings and approved shop drawings. Unauthorized or unscheduled splices not approved by the Engineer in writing will not be accepted.

B. All lap splices in reinforcing steel shall be contact lap splices unless detailed otherwise on the drawings.

C. Maintain proper cover between reinforcing bars at splices.

D. Lap unscheduled reinforcing bars not otherwise specified a minimum of 30 bar diameters at splices.

3.5 WELDING REINFORCING STEEL

A. Welding reinforcing steel is permitted only where specifically shown on the drawings. All welding shall conform to AWS D1.4 “Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel". Only weldable reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A706 or deformed bar anchors conforming to ASTM A496 shall be permitted. ASTM A615 Grade 40 or Grade 60 may not be welded for structural use.

B. Scheduled or detailed reinforcing steel shall not be tack welded for any reason.

3.6 PLACEMENT OF WELDED WIRE FABRIC

A. Wherever welded wire fabric is specified as reinforcement in slabs, it shall be continuous and properly lapped one full wire spacing plus 2" across the entire concrete surface and not interrupted by beams or girders.

3.7 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS


A. Refer to mechanical and plumbing drawings for formed concrete requiring reinforcing steel. Such reinforcement shall be furnished as part of the work of this Section.

3.8 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING OF REINFORCING STEEL DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Identified Stock: Where job material is taken from bundles as delivered from the mill, is properly identified as to heat number and is accompanied by mill and analysis test reports, such material shall be used without further local tests provided an affidavit is given from the Supplier to the Contractor's Testing Laboratory that the materials conform with the requirements of the ASTM specification as listed on the structural drawings. In case of controversy, the procedure as stipulated below for unidentified stock shall be followed.

B. Unidentified Stock:

1. For all unidentified stock, the Contractor's Testing Laboratory shall secure samples of the reinforcing steel bars at the time of inspection. The samples shall conform to the following:

a. The sample shall include 2 bars for each ten tons or fraction thereof, of each bar size, heat number, and manufacturer being shipped.

b. The sample bars shall be a minimum of 24 inches in length and shall be identical to the material being shipped.

2. The Contractor's Testing Laboratory shall tag each of the steel bundles with the Laboratory identification tag and appropriately mark the samples corresponding to the steel being inspected and shipped. The fabricator will supply shipping lists showing the weight of each bar size in the shipment. The sample reinforcing bars shall be returned to the Contractor's Testing Laboratory for tensile strength tests and bend tests according to ASTM A615.

END OF SECTION

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work covered by this Section of the specifications consists of furnishing all materials, labor, hardware, equipment and services required in conjunction with or related to the forming, delivery and pouring of all cast-in-place concrete work. Extent of concrete work is shown on the drawings, including schedules, notes and details which show size and location of members and type of concrete to be poured.



B. Inspection and Testing of the Work: Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the Architect/Engineer, at any time during progress of work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities. Tests not specifically indicated to be done at the Owner's expense, including retesting of rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. Inspection and testing by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, patching compounds, epoxies, grouts, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, hardeners, sealers and others as requested by Architect/Engineer.

B. Laboratory Test Reports and Mix Designs: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix designs as specified in this section.

C. Material and Mill Certificates: Provide material and mill certificates as specified herein and in the Testing Laboratory section of the specifications. Material and mill certificates shall be signed by the manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.

D. Construction Joints: Submit drawings of proposed construction joints in concrete for slab-on-grade.



1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings"


2. ACI 302, "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction" 3. ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete" 4. ACI 305, "Hot Weather Concreting" 5. ACI 306, "Cold Weather Concreting" 6. ACI 318-05 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" 7. CRSI "Reinforced Concrete, Manual of Standard Practice"

1.5 PROVISION FOR OTHER WORK

A. Provide for installation of inserts, hangers, metal ties, anchors, bolts, angle guards, dowels, thimbles, slots, nailing strips, blocking, grounds and other fastening devices required for attachment of work. Properly locate in cooperation with other trades and secure in position before concrete is poured.

B Protect adjacent finish materials against damage and spatter during concrete placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Refer to the drawings for classes and strengths of concrete required.

B. Portland Cement: ANSI/ASTM C150, Type I or Type III. Use one brand of cement, for each class of concrete, throughout the project.

C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ANSI/ASTM C33.

D. Lightweight aggregates: ANSI/ASTM C330.

E. Water: Clean, fresh, potable, free of oils, acids or organic matter harmful to concrete.

F. Water-Reducing Admixture: ANSI/ASTM C494.

Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified and is compatible with all other admixtures being used.

G. Calcium Chloride and Chloride Ion Content:

1. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride shall not be used in concrete containing embedded aluminum and in concrete on galvanized metal deck.

2. Admixtures containing more than 0.1% chloride ions are not permitted subject to maximum water soluble chloride ion content specified below.

3. The maximum water soluble chloride ion concentration in hardened concrete at ages from 28 to 42 days contributed from all ingredients including water, aggregates, cementitious materials, and admixtures shall not exceed the limits specified in ACI 318-99 Table 4.3.1. Water soluble chloride ion tests shall conform to AASHTD T260.


The Contractor shall have his Testing Laboratory verify in a written submittal to the Architect/Engineer and owner's Testing Laboratory that the chloride ion content in all concrete mix designs used on the project will not exceed limits stated above.

H. Straight calcium chloride, or admixtures containing more than 0.1% chloride ions shall not be permitted.

I. Written conformance to all of the above mentioned requirements and the chloride ion content of the admixture as tested by an accredited laboratory shall be required from the admixture manufacturer at the time of mix design review by the Engineer.

2.2 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Moisture Barrier: provide multi-ply reinforced polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM E1745, Class C, not less than 7.8 mils thick; or polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D4397, not less than 10 mils thick. Install, protect and repair moisture barrier sheets according to ASTM E1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s recommended tape.

B. Moisture Retaining Cover: One of the following complying with ANSI/ASTM C171:

1. Waterproof paper; 2. Polyethylene film; 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.

C. Liquid Membrane Forming Curing Compounds:

1. Concrete Floors Exposed to Foot Traffic and Columns: Liquid type membrane forming curing compound complying with ASTM C309, Type I or I-D except that moisture loss shall not exceed 0.030 gr/sq cm (grams per square centimeter).

2. All Other Concrete Surfaces: Liquid type membrane forming curing compound complying with ASTM C309, Type I, Class A with a moisture loss of not more than 0.055 gr/sq cm (grams per square centimeter) when applied to 200 sf/gal (square feet per gallon).

Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified and is compatible with all subsequent surface treatments.

D. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base for use in cosmetic and/or nonstructural repairs.

E. Non-Shrink Grout:

1. Type: Grout for bearing plates shall be a non-metallic, shrinkage resistant, premixed, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing Portland cement, silica sands, shrinkage compensating agents and fluidity improving compounds.

2. Specifications: Non-shrink grout shall conform to Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout, CE-CRD-C621.

3. Compressive strength: Compressive strength at twenty eight days as determined by grout cube tests, shall be 6,000 PSI.

F. Expansion Bolts in Concrete:


1. Only concrete anchors approved by the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) with a published Research Report shall be approved for use.

2. Type: All expansion bolts in concrete shall be wedge type expansion bolts. 3. Interior Use: All expansion bolts, nuts and washer for use in interior conditioned

environments free from potential moisture shall be manufactured from carbon steel zinc plated in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-Z-325C, Type II, Class 3.

4. Exterior or Exposed Use: All expansion bolts, nuts and washers for use in exposed environments, or for attachment of exterior cladding materials shall be galvanized or stainless steel.

a. Galvanized bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM A153. b. Stainless steel bolts shall be manufactured from 300 series stainless steel and

nuts and washers from 300 series or type 18-8 stainless steel.

5. Nuts and Washers: Nuts and washers shall be furnished from the manufacturer and used with the bolts.

6. Products:

a. "Kwik-Bolt" or "Super Kwik-Bolt"; Hilti Fastening Systems. b. "Red Head Wedge Anchor"; ITT Phillips Drill Division. c. "Parabolt"; Molly Fastener Group.

G. Adhesive Bolts in Concrete:

1. Only adhesive anchors approved by the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) with a published Research Report shall be approved for u

2. Type: Adhesive bolts shall consist of a threaded steel rod meeting the requirements of ASTM A307 and a sealed capsule containing a two part system of modified vinylester resin and hardener (dibenzoyl peroxide). Adhesive Anchors containing polyester resin shall not be used.

3. Exterior Use: Adhesive bolts used in exterior, exposed, potentially wet environments and for attachment of exterior cladding materials shall have galvanized or stainless steel threaded rods.

a. Galvanized threaded rods, nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM A153 galvanized steel.

b. Stainless steel threaded rods, nuts and washers shall be 300 series stainless steel.

4. Products:

a. "HEA Vinylester Capsule" or "HIT-C-100 Cartridge System"; Hilti Fastening Systems.

H. Reglets: Where resilient or elastomeric sheet flashing or bituminous membrane are terminated in reglets, provide reglets o not less than 26 gage galvanized sheet steel. Fill reglets or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.3 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES:


A. The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Architect/Engineer and Owner's Testing Laboratory, at least 15 days prior to the start of construction, concrete mix designs for each class of concrete indicated on the structural drawings. The Contractor shall not begin work until the applicable mix design has been approved.

B. The concrete shall be proportioned by either of the following methods outlined in ACI318. The method used shall be documented in writing and submitted with the mix designs.

1. Field Experience Method: When the field experience method is used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301 and ACI 211.

2. Laboratory Trial Mixture Method: When the field experience method is used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301 and ACI 211.

3. ACI 318-05 Table 5.4

C. All mix designs shall state the following information:

1. Mix design number by which the Contractor shall order the concrete from the Supplier; 2. Structural member for which the concrete is designed; 3. Type of concrete; 4. 28-day compressive strength; 5. Aggregate type, source, size, gradation, fineness modulus; 6. Cement type and brand; 7. Fly ash or other pozzolan type and brand (if any); 8. Admixtures including air entrainment, water reducers, accelerators, and retarders; 9. Slump; 10. Water cement ratio; 11. Proportions of each material used; 12. Method by which concrete is intended to be placed (bucket, chute, or pump).

D. Admixtures:

1. Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer and Owner's Testing Laboratory.

2. Quantities of admixtures to be used shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities of admixtures as required to maintain quality control.

E. Slump Limits: Slump limits are shown on the drawings. When increase workability, pumpability, or lower water-cement ratio, or shrinkage reduction is required, then a superplaticizer admixture shall be considered for use. The maximum slump with the use of superplasticizers shall be 8 inches unless approved otherwise by the Architect/Engineer and Owner's Testing Laboratory.

F. Adjustment of Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. Such mix design adjustments shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Any adjustments in approved mix designs, including changes in admixtures shall be submitted in writing to the Architect/Engineer and Owner's Testing Laboratory for approval prior to field use.


G. Shrinkage: All concrete shall be proportioned for a maximum allowable unit shrinkage of 0.03% measured at 28 days after curing as determined by ASTM C157 (using air storage).

H. Chloride Ion Content: A written submittal shall be made with each mix design proposed for use on the project that the chloride ion content from all ingredients including admixtures does not exceed the limits specified.

2.4 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with ASTM C94, "Ready Mixed Concrete".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 JOINTS IN CONCRETE

A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on the drawings or if not shown on drawings, located so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

1. Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in construction joints in walls, slabs, and between walls and footings.

2. The Contractor shall submit a drawing showing location of all structural floor and slab-on-grade construction joint plan locations for Architect/Engineer review and approval.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing where specified by the Architect, and to receive thru-wall flashings in outer face or concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels and other condition.

B. Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting type screeds.

3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Pre-placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where from coatings are not used.

B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.

C. Comply with ACI 304 for concrete placement requirements.


3.4 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough Form Finish: Provide rough form finish for formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in the finish work unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down or chipped off.

B. Smooth Form Finish: Provide smooth form finish for formed concrete surfaces exposed-to-view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, damp proofing, painting or other similar system. This is as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas, with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES

A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor toping. After placing slabs, plane surface to tolerance specified below. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes.

B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified. After screeding, consolidating and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface wear has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance as specified below. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint or other thin film finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing wound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a level surface to a tolerance as specified below. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering systems.

D. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete steps and ramps and elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.6 CONCRETE FINISH TOLERANCES


A. Variation from Level in Slabs: Slab flatness and levelness shall be in accordance with ASTM E1155. Variation from Level in Slab Finishes: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Slabs in the vicinity of the Operable Partitions shall not vary by more than 1/8” for the entire length of the partition.

B. Slab-on-Grade Construction (except as noted below):

1. Concrete Placement: Concrete shall be placed and screeded to determined marks conforming to elevations prescribed on the drawings.

2. Slabs specified to slope shall be within +1/2" and -1/4" of the specified elevation and conform to tolerance specified above.

3.7 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General:

1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of concrete. In hot dry and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation control material. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.

2. Curing shall commence as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after placing and finishing. The curing period shall be 7 days for all concrete except high early strength concrete which shall be cured for 3 days minimum.

3. Curing shall be in accordance with ACI 301. Avoid rapid drying at the end of the curing period.

B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of all concrete horizontal and vertical surfaces (including columns) by one of the methods specified or by combinations thereof, as herein specified. The Contractor shall choose a curing method that is compatible with the requirements for subsequent material usage on the concrete surface.

1. Moisture Curing: Provide moisture curing by one of the following methods:

a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating

cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Cover Curing: Provide moisture-cover curing by covering concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Provide curing/hardener or liquid membrane forming curing and sealing compound to interior slabs with resilient flooring, carpet over cushion, or left exposed; and to exterior slabs, walks and curbs, by strictly following manufacturer's recommendations.


C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Where wooden forms are used, cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. When forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.

D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping and other flat surfaces by application of appropriate curing compound.

3.8 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING

A. Definition:

1. Conditions warranting hot weather concreting practices are defined as any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair the quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise result in abnormal properties.

2. The maximum acceptable concrete temperature at the truck discharge point shall be 95° F.

B. Hot weather concreting practices required to limit the concrete temperature at the truck discharge point to 95° F or lower shall be followed according t o ACI 305 "Hot Weather Concreting".

C. Under hot weather conditions, the Contractor shall keep records of outside air temperature, concrete temperature at truck discharge and general weather conditions.

3.9 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING

A. Definition:

1. Concrete shall not be placed on any day when the outside air temperature is 40° F or less and falling unless cold weather concreting practices are followed.

B. Cold weather concreting practices required to limit the concrete temperatures as specified above shall be followed according to ACI 306 "Cold Weather Concreting".

C. Under cold weather conditions, the Contractor shall keep records of outside air temperature, concrete temperature as placed and general weather conditions.

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.


3.12 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Tests of Portland Cement: Portland Cement shall be tested by the Contractor's Testing Laboratory for compliance with the requirements of ASTM C150.

1. Mill Certificates: Mill certificates certifying that the cement has been tested and meets the requirements of the specifications will be acceptable as test results, provided the cement proposed for use can be identified with test lots. Mill certificates shall be submitted by the Contractor prior to use of any such material.

2. Retesting: Retesting of cement will be required if:

a. In the opinion of the Owner, Architect, or Engineer, the cement has bee damaged in storage or transit or is in any way defective.

b. The cement has been in storage at the mixing site for over 30 days.

3. Cube Tests: Compressive strength cube specimens shall be made by the Contractor's Testing Laboratory at the start of the job and at a frequency of one set per 250 tons of cement or whenever the source or brand of cement changes so that the quality of cement can be observed throughout the project. Each set of 2 inch cubes shall consist of four cubes tested according to ASTM C109 at 28 day strengths.

B. Test of Aggregates:

1. The Contractor's Testing laboratory shall verify that concrete aggregates proposed for use conform to ASTM C33.

2. The following tests will be required:

a. Sampling of aggregates: ASTM D75; b. Sieve analysis: ASTM C136; c. Organic impurities: ASTM C40; d. Soundness: ASTM C88; e Abrasion of concrete aggregate: ASTM C131; f. Specific gravity: ASTM C127 and ASTM C128; g. Deleterious materials: ASTM C33; h. Materials passing No. 200 sieve: ASTM C177.

Supplier's record of such tests run on the proposed material will be adequate provided a written affidavit is furnished as a shop drawing submittal.

C. Concrete Batch Trip Tickets: All concrete batch trip tickets shall be collected and retained by the Contractor. Compressive strength, slump, air, and temperature tests shall be identified by reference to a particular trip ticket. All tickets shall contain the information specified in ASTM C94.

D. Cylinder Storage Box: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a protected concrete cylinder storage box at a point on the job site mutually agreeable with the Testing Laboratory for the purpose of storing concrete cylinders until they are transported to the Laboratory.


END OF SECTION

REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04820 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 04820 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The work covered by this Section of the specifications consists of furnishing all materials, labor, hardware, equipment and services required for the installation of all reinforced masonry construction as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Reinforced masonry construction includes concrete filled masonry beams, columns, pilasters, lintels, and soffits. Accessories include, but are not necessarily limited to ties, horizontal and vertical reinforcement, anchors to the structure, and control joints.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 04810 “Unit Masonry”.



B. Inspection and Testing of the Work: Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the Architect/Engineer, at any time during progress of work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities. Tests not specifically indicated to be done at the Owner's expense, including retesting of rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. Inspection and testing by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.



1. ACI 530/ASCE 5, "Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures" 2. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, "Specifications for Masonry Structures"

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placements of reinforcement bars and for templates for layout of dowels for columns and pilasters shall be submitted for Engineer's approval.

2. Shop drawings shall show arrangement and layout, bending and assembly diagrams, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, splicing and laps of bars, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. Shop drawings shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315 Standards.


B. Mill Certificates: Provide mill certificates for all reinforcement signed by Contractor and producer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Section 04810 Unit Masonry for masonry materials and accessories not included in this section. Refer to the drawings for classes and strengths of concrete required. Refer to the drawings for strength of masonry required for load bearing and exterior walls.

B. Reinforcement:

1. Reinforcing Steel: Refer to Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement for reinforcing steel. 2. Where No. 2 bars are shown, provide plain, round, carbon steel bars, ASTM A675, Grade

80.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Refer to Section 04810 Unit Masonry for general installation requirements of unit masonry.

3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross section due to excessive rusting or other causes.

B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Vertical bars shall be held in position at the top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 8'-0" with a minimum clearance of 1/4" from the face of the masonry and not less than one bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater) between adjacent bars.

C. For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance between vertical bars as indicated, but not less than 1 1/2 times the nominal bar diameter or 1 1/2", whichever is greater. Provide lateral ties as indicated.

D. All dowels shall be grouted into a cell even if the dowel is in an adjacent cell to the vertical steel. Unless detailed otherwise on the drawings, dowels shall be the same size and number as the vertical steel. Unless noted otherwise provide a lap length of dowels to vertical reinforcement equal to 50 times the nominal dowel diameter. Dowels for columns and pilasters shall be set using templates. Templates shall be detailed and submitted with reinforcing steel shop drawings.

E. All horizontal reinforcing steel shall be placed in continuous bond beam or lintel block units and shall be solidly grouted in place. Maintain a minimum of one bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater) clearance between adjacent bars and a minimum of 1/4" clearance from the face of the masonry. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses.


F. Splice reinforcing bars where shown. Do not slice at other points unless acceptable to the Engineer. In splicing vertical bars or dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie. Minimum lap splice length shall be 50 bar diameters unless noted otherwise.

G. Where reinforcement is prefabricated into cage units before placing, fabricate units with vertical reinforcement bars and lateral ties or the size and spacing indicated.

3.3 FORMWORK

A. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of masonry elements.

B. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar, grout or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

C. Formwork shall not be removed until the reinforced masonry member has cured sufficiently to carry its own weight and any other loads that may be placed on it during construction. Allow not less than the following minimum time to elapse after completion of the member before removing shores or forms provided adequate curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period:

1. Lintels and beams - 10 days 2. Allow 16 hours to elapse after completion of masonry columns and walls before placing

floor or roof construction loads.

3. 4 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

A. General:

1. Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Lay CMU units with full-face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints

between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face hells. Solidly bed cross-webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8" joints.

B. Walls:

1. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities which are to be reinforced and grouted to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcing bars. Keep cavities free of mortar.

2. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or modify regular units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcement bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cell of non-reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms.

C. Grouting:


1. General:

a. Use "Fine Grout" as per ASTM C476 for filling spaces less than 4" in one or both horizontal directions.

b. Use "Coarse Grout" as per ASTM C476 for filling 4" spaces or larger in both horizontal directions.

c. Use 3000 PSI normal weight concrete for filling spaces 10" and larger in both directions.

d. Grouting Technique: At Contractor's option, use either low-lift or high-lift grouting techniques subject to the requirements which follow.

2. Low-Lift Grouting:

a. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 square inches in vertical cores to be grouted.

b. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameter nor 10 feet.

c. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5 feet height, or if bond beam occurs below 5 feet height stop pour at course below bond beam.

d. Pour grout using chute or container with spout. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously. Do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1 1/2" below top course of pour.

e. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1 1/2" below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcement in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam.

3. High-Lift Grouting:

a. Do not use high-lift grouting technique for grouting of CMU unless minimum cavity dimension and area is 3" and 10 square inches respectively.

b. Provide clan-out holes in the first course of masonry by omitting every other masonry unit along the foundation, at bottom of wall, over all bond beams, door headers, or other openings. Use a high pressure water jet to remove excess mortar and drippings from grout core and from reinforcement each day during construction.

c. Do not plug clean-out holes until condition of area to be grouted has been inspected and accepted.

d. Construct masonry to full height of maximum grout pour specified, prior to placing grout.

e. Limit grout lifts to a maximum height of 5 feet and grout pour to a maximum height of 24 feet, for single width hollow concrete masonry walls, unless otherwise indicated.

f. Place horizontal beam reinforcement as the masonry units are laid. g. Embed lateral tie reinforcement in mortar units are laid, at vertical spacing

shown.

4. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcement and adjust to proper position. Clean top surface of


structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures to resist grout pressures.

5. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations.

6. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces. 7. Place grout in lintels or beams in one continuous pour. 8. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend

reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1 1/2" of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required.

D. Anchoring:

1 Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structure as indicated. 2. Anchor reinforced masonry walls to non-reinforced masonry where they intersect.

END OF SECTION

STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1..1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1..2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on drawings including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of members, typical connections, and types of steel required.

1. Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on drawings.

2. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications are specified elsewhere in Division 5. 3. Refer to Division 3 for anchor bolt installation in concrete, Division 4 for anchor bolt installation in

masonry.

1..3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards).

1. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and physical properties.

2. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers. 3. Structural steel primer paint. 4. Shrinkage-resistant grout.

C. Shop drawings prepared under supervision of a licensed Structural Engineer, including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures, and diagrams.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols and show size, length, and type of each weld.

2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed as work of other sections.

D. Test reports conducted on shop- and field-bolted and welded connections. Include data on type(s) of tests conducted and test results.

STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2 N.W. 9th Street Office Building – Job Number: B-30533. WAP Project No. 27036.00 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

E. Certified copies of each survey conducted by a licensed Land Surveyor, showing elevations and locations of base plates and anchor bolts to receive structural steel and final elevations and locations for major members. Indicate discrepancies between actual installation and contract documents.

1..4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following, except as otherwise indicated:

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

a. Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence:

1) "This approval constitutes the owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings."

2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," including "Commentary." 3. "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the

Research Council on Structural Connections. 4. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and

Bars for Structural Use."

B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Qualification" requirements.

1. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests.

2. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility.

1..5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.

B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not to delay work.

C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and relubricate before use.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


1..1 MATERIALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work that will be exposed to view, use only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and applying surface finishes.

B. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A572 Gr.50.

C. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A 501.

1. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized.

E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated.

F. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low-carbon steel bolts and nuts.

1. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections. 2. Provide either hexagonal or square heads and nuts, except use only hexagonal units for

exposed connections.

G. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows:

1. Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers, complying with ASTM A 325.

a. Where indicated as galvanized, provide units that are zinc coated, either mechanically deposited complying with ASTM B 695, Class 50, or hot-dip galvanized complying with ASTM A 153.

2. Quenched and tempered alloy steel bolts, nuts, and washers, complying with ASTM A 490.

H. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code.

I. Structural Steel Primer Paint: SSPC - Paint 1; red lead and oil.

J. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean, uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

K. Nonmetallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining product containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with CE-CRD-C621.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:


a. 100 Non-Shrink Grout (Non-Metallic); Conspec, Inc. b. Supreme Grout; Cormix, Inc. c. Sure Grip Grout; Dayton Superior. d. Euco N.S.; Euclid Chemical Co. e. Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. Masterflow 713; Master Builders. g. Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows. h. Propak; Protex Industries, Inc. i. Set Non-Shrink; Set Products, Inc. j. Five Star Grout; U.S. Grout Corp.

1..2 FABRICATION

A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated.

1. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.

2. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects.

B. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated.

C. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated.

1. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for principal bolted connections, except where unfinished bolts are indicated.

2. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only bolted connections of secondary framing members to primary members (including purlins, and other framing members taking only nominal stresses) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erection.

D. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

E. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

F. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings.

G. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work.

H. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.

1..3 SHOP PAINTING

A. General: Shop-paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be embedded


in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel that is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2 inches of embedded areas only.

1. Do not paint surfaces to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction-type connections. 2. Do not paint surfaces scheduled to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. 3. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change

color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows:

1. SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning." 2. SP-2 "Hand-Tool Cleaning." 3. SP-3 "Power-Tool Cleaning."

4. SP-7 "Brush-Off Blast Cleaning."

C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use painting methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

D. Painting: Provide a one-coat, shop-applied paint system complying with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Paint System Guide No. 7.00.

1..4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements.

1. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not comply.

B. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without causing delay in the work.

1. Promptly notify Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of structure are not clearly indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1..1 ERECTION

A. Surveys: Employ a licensed land surveyor for accurate erection of structural steel. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Architect. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Architect.

B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to


achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds.

C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work.

D. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates.

1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices.

2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.

3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.

4. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances.

F. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service.

G. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings.

H. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds, and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.

1. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

I. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted.

J. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.

K. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on structural steel is included in Division 9 under painting work.

1..2 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor shall engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports.

B. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests, state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom.


C. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished.

D. Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment.

E. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and laboratory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's expense, as necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work and to show compliance of corrected work.

F. Shop-Bolted Connections: Inspect or test in accordance with AISC specifications.

G. Shop Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies, as follows:

1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies.

2. Perform visual inspection of all welds. 3. Perform tests of welds as follows. Inspection procedures listed are to be used at Contractor's

option.

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration not acceptable. c. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level "2-2T." d. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

H. Field-Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications.

I. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows:

1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies.

2. Perform visual inspection of all welds. 3. Perform tests of welds as follows:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration not acceptable. c. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level "2-2T." d. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

END OF SECTION

METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections. 3. Shelf angles. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 5. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards.


1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" 2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies"

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Comply with requirements of OSHA Instructions STD 1-3.3 for intermittent stabilization anchors of window cleaning equipment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.


1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and in particular the height of existing balcony as well as other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.7 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Fabrication and installation of fixed ladders at roof access shall comply with applicable subsections of OSHA 29 CFR 1910.27.

B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code – Steel” and AWS D1.2.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.


2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.3 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.

E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with MFMA-3.

F. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads.

2.4 NONFERROUS METALS

A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.

C. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

D. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B429, Alloy 6063-T6.

1. Provide standard weight schedule 40 pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1.


C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

D. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.

E. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

G. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.

H. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.

I. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.

J. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1, 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79.

1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

D. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Available Products:

a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19.


b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. c. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer. e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. g. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97.

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

G. Finish for Exposed Aluminum Components Surfaces: Electrostatically applied thermosetting T.G.I.C. polyester powder paint over pretreatment bond coating. Paint to be 1.5 to 2.0 mils DFT. Coating with inhibitive flash primer over conversion coating. Meet or exceed AAMA 2603-98 standards. Coordinate shade to match finish on other items specified elsewhere. Submit color samples for approval. Color to be selected by Architect.

H. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.

I. Nonshrink, Gypsum-Free Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

J. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.


3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.

C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated in the drawings, in the specifications, and on all materials subject to exterior exposure.

2.9 SHELF ANGLES

A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint

approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.

B. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.

C. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.

D. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete.


2.10 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize plates after fabrication.

C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.

2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim, where indicated.

2.13 PIPE GUARDS

A. Fabricate pipe guards from 1/8-inch- thick steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 1-inch clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch anchor bolts.

2.14 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.


2.15 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below:

1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding; Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.


D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A-780.


END OF SECTION

ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. framing and wood blocking and backing with dimension lumber. 2. Rooftop plywood and wood blocking and nailers. 3. Plywood backing at electrical, telephone and similar rooms.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.

2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

4. Submit Miami-Dade County – N.O.A. for miscellaneous metal connectors for exterior wood connectors.



1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on

end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency].

3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-

inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and one of the following: a. Ammoniacal, or amine, copper quat (ACQ). b. Copper bis (dimethyldithiocarbamate) (CDDC). c. Ammoniacal copper citrate (CC). d. Copper azole, Type A (CBA-A). e. Oxine copper (copper-8-quinolinolate) in a light petroleum solvent.

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.


C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following species:

1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide G185 Hot-Dip galvanized fasteners complying with ASTM A 653, or stainless steel.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.


1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).

2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated, and as follows:

1. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by Miami-Dade County – N.O.A., that meet or exceed those indicated.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.

C. Bent Plate Brackets: galvanized steel brackets to secure wood outriggers to the wall with bolts.

1. Bolt Diameter: 5/8 inch. 2. Width: as indicated 3. Body Thickness: 1/8 inch or as otherwise indicated. 4. Refer to structural plans.


A. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.


C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood.

END OF SECTION

FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior standing and running trim for field-painted finish.


1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view and for structural wood decking and framing exposed to view.

2. Division 8 “Finish hardware”. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, textures, and colors.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for paneling and siding for each type of material indicated.


C. Research/Evaluation Reports: Showing that fire-retardant-treated wood complies with building code in effect for Project.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials are indicated, provide materials with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation.

C. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria":

1. Interior standing and running trim.


A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.

B. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, or dampness.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.

2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.

B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

C. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM

A. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), either finger-jointed or solid lumber, of one of the following species and grades:

1. Grade Superior Prime, Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir south; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

B. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7. Wood moldings made from kiln-dried stock and graded under WMMPA WM 4.


A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.

1. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.

B. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished work:

C. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours, unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer.


A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.

1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.

B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.

1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish

carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation.

4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.



CLAY ROOF TILES 07321 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 07321 - CLAY ROOF TILES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Clay roof tiles. 2. Tile accessories. 3. Felt underlayment.


1. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079, glossaries in RTI/WSRCA's "Concrete and Clay Roof Tile Design Criteria Installation Manual for Moderate Climate Regions," and NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of clay tile and clay tile accessory indicated.

1. Include similar Samples of trim involving color selection.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected:

1. Clay Tile: Full size. 2. Clay Tile Accessories: Full size. 3. Fastenings: Wire-tie system components, 12 inches long. 4. Self-Adhering Underlayment: 12 inches square.


D. Current Miami-Dade County Product Control Notice of Acceptance for all components of the roofing system complying with all of the requirements of the project.

E. Signed and sealed shop drawings and calculations prepared by a Florida Registered Engineer indicating compliance with the wind pressures indicated on the structural drawings.

F. Maintenance Data: For clay tile roofing to include in maintenance manuals.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain clay tiles and clay tile accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide clay tiles and related roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; UL 790 or ASTM E 108 for application and roof slopes indicated.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double-stack rolls.

1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members.

B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer.


1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. Roof Tile Units and Finishing Units: Full-size units equal to 1 square.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Clay Roof Tile Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace tile that fails in materials within specified warranty period. Material failures include manufacturing defects that result in leaks.

1. Material Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Roofing Installer's Warranty: Roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by roofing Installer, covering Work of this Section, in which roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace components of clay tile roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within the following warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLAY TILES

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer:

1. Tejas Borja; Spanish S Borja TB-12 (Product Approval N.O.A. 03-0306.15)

B. Clay Tile: ASTM C 1167, molded- or extruded-clay roof tile units of shape and configuration indicated, kiln fired to vitrification, and free of surface imperfections. Provide with fastening holes prepunched at factory before firing.

1. Durability: Grade 1. 2. High-Profile Shape: Type I, Spanish or S. 3. Size: 17.25”L x 10.25W. 4. Color: Four (4) colors will be selected from Manufacturer’s full range of colors for

specified tile. 5. High-Profile-Shape Clay Tile Accessories Units, color to match roof tile.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.


B. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type IV.

C. Foam Adhesive: Two-component polyurethane expanding adhesive recommended for application by tile manufacturer and Miami-Dade Product Approval N.O.A.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667, aluminum, 0.1055-inch- diameter shank, sharp-pointed, conventional roofing nails with barbed shanks; minimum 3/8-inch- diameter head; and of sufficient length to penetrate through the roof-deck sheathing not less than 3/16” as per RAS 120.

1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing.

2. Nails shall be applied through “tin caps” not less than 1-5/8” and not more than 2” in diameter and of not less than 32 gage (0.010”) sheet metal. All caps shall be Product Control Listed.

2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Roof Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II, asphalt-saturated organic felt, unperforated.

B. Roll Roofing Underlayment: ASTM D 249, Type I, asphalt-saturated and -coated organic felt, mineral-granule surfaced.

E.C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40 milsthick; slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied.

1. Products (Submit Miami-Dade Product Approval N.O.A.):

a. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Grace Ice and Water Shield. b. Owens Corning; WeatherLock M. c. Protecto Wrap Company; Rainproof TM. d. Approved Equal.

2.5 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

��


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through roof.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Install underlayments according to tile manufacturer's written recommendations and recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and the Miami-Dade Product Approval N.O.A."

B. Double-Layer Roof Felt/Roll Roofing Underlayment:

1. Install single layer of roof felt underlayment perpendicular to roof slope in parallel courses. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with roofing nails.

2. Install roll roofing underlayment in same direction as roof felt underlayment in parallel courses. Lap ends a minimum of 6 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches.

a. Adhere to felt underlayment with solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature.

3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Install metal flashings according to tile manufacturer's written recommendations and recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."


3.4 TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof tiles according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in RTI/WSRCA's "Concrete and Clay Roof Tile Design Criteria Installation Manual for Moderate Climate Regions," to NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, and to Miami-Dade Product Approval N.O.A."

1. Maintain uniform exposure and coursing of tiles throughout roof. 2. Extend tiles 2 inches over eave fasciae. 3. Foam-Adhesive Setting: Install tile according to FRSA/NTRMA's "Concrete and Clay

Roof Tile Installation Manual" and Miami-Dade Product Approval N.O.A. 4. Cut and fit tiles neatly around roof vents, pipes, ventilators, and other projections through

roof. Fill voids with mortar. 5. Install tiles with color blend approved by Architect.

a. Close voids where ridge tiles meet roof tiles with ridge closure tiles.

B. High-Profile Tile Installation:

1. Install tile eave closure. 2. Provide minimum 3-inch lap between succeeding courses of tiles. 3. Install roll rake tiles. 4. Install ridge tiles with laps facing away from prevailing wind. Seal laps with asphalt

roofing cement.

C. Open Valleys: Cut tiles at open valleys to form straight lines. Widen exposed portion of open valley 1/8 inch in 12 inches from highest to lowest point.


A. Remove and replace damaged or broken tiles.

B. Remove excess tile and debris from Project site.


SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories: 1. Metal counter flashing. 2. Roof penetration flashing.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 7 Section 07920 "Joint and Sealants" for elastomeric sealants. 2. Division 7 Section 07321 “Clay Roof Tiles”.


A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.

B. Fabricate and install flashings in accordance with the Florida Building Code and Miami-Dade County Product Approval – N.O.A.

C. Roof Application Standard RAS 111.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Submit shop drawings for all metal flashings and trims, including attachment requirements and N.O.A. if applicable.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.



A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes.

1. Anodized Finish (apply the following coil-anodized finish):

a. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14.

2.2 REGLETS

A. General: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces and compatible with flashing indicated.

B. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.

C. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to match thickness of applied finish materials.

D. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends.

E. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips (as per N.O.A.; 24” o.c. minimum): Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of the counterflashing lower edge.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.

B. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.


D. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior and interior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

F. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.

G. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated.

B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

E. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

G. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates (including pressure treated wood and poured in place concrete) by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

2.5 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements N.O.A.’s if applicable but not less than that listed below for each application and metal.


A. Flashings / drip edges at tile roofing: Fabricate from the following material:

1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick

B. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material:

1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick.

C. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:

1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.0276 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, N.O.A. if applicable, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.

B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

C. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work.

1. Do not solder the following metals:

a. Aluminum.


2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant.

1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.

E. Drip Flashing at Standing Seam Metal Roofs: Flashing attachment to be as per ANSI/SPRI ES-1-98 (continuous cleat for positive attachment).

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

G. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates (including pressure treated wood and poured in place concrete) by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

H. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches and bed with sealant.

I. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member.

J. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:

1. Turn flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion.


JOINT SEALANTS 07920 – 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 07920 – JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section:

1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry with stucco finish. c. Joints between different materials indicated. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors. e. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces. f. Other joints as indicated on drawings and in the specifications. g. Joints between dissimilar materials.

2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:

a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Joints between building components and sidewalks, concrete pads, and driveways. c. Other joints as indicated on drawings and in the specifications. d. Joints between dissimilar materials.

3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and wood

trim. d. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. e. Control joints in tile flooring. f. Other joints as indicated on drawings and in the specifications. g. Joints between dissimilar materials.



1. Division 4 Section “Reinforced Unit Masonry” for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets.

2. Division 8 Section “Steel Doors and Frames”. 3. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board

partitions to reduce sound transmission. 4. Division 9 Section “Ceramic Tile”. 5. Division 15 Section “Plumbing Fixtures, Trim and Support”.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.

D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.


1. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for “Product Test Reports” Paragraph in “Submittals” Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.

1.7 PRODUCT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.

2. When joint substrates are wet.

B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Installer’s Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


1. Warranty period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

D. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer’s written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each type in the sealant schedules of Part 3.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range for this characteristic.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.

B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that


have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

2.4 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1085 for each product of this description indicated in the Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Schedule of Part 3.

B. Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: For each product of this description indicated in the Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3 provide manufacturer’s standard, solvent-release-curing, pigmented, synthetic-rubber sealant complying with AAMA 803.3 and formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width.

2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule of Part 3.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in the Acoustical Joint-Sealant Schedule of Part 3, provide manufacturer’s standard non-sag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:

1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in the Acoustical Joint-Sealant Schedule of Part 3, provide manufacturer’s standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.

2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. 2. Type O: Open-cell material. 3. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin. 4. Type: Any material indicated above.

C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at


temperatures down to minus 25 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following:


a. Concrete b. Masonry.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint surfaces include the following:

a. Metal b. Glass

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints.

F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.


3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.

a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.

H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, to produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant to comply with sealant manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.

3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Low-Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:

1. Products: Provide one of the following:

a. 790; Dow Corning. b. Spectrem 1; Tremco. c. Pecora 890.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25.


4. Additional Movement Capability: 100 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression for a total of 150 percent movement.

5. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, concrete, masonry, and stucco.

7. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248. 8. Applications:

a. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces of architectural pre-cast concrete, poured-in-place concrete, masonry, and stucco.

b. Exterior joints between metal and concrete, mortar, masonry.

B. Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:


a. 795; Dow Corning. b. Spectrem 2; Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, veneer stone, concrete, masonry, and stucco.

6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248. 7. Applications:

a. Exposed joints within glazed wall system(s) and aluminum framing system.

C. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes, and that comply with the following:


a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning. b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. c. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation. d. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25.


4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Painted gypsum wallboard, porcelain fixtures, galvanized steel, and ceramic tile.

6. Applications:

a. Interior joints in vertical surfaces of ceramic tile in toilet rooms and showers. b. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining gypsum dry-wall or ceramic tile walls in

toilet rooms and showers.

D. Pourable Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:


a. 890-SL; Dow Corning. b. FC Parking Structure Sealant (M,P,NT); Dow Corning. c. SL Parking Structure Sealant (S,P,NT); Dow Corning.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) or S (single component) and P (pourable). 3. Class: 25. 4. Additional Movement Capability: 100 percent movement in extension and 25 percent in

compression for a total of 125 percent movement. 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 6. Applications:

a. Exterior Joints between building components and sidewalks, concrete pads, and driveways.

3.7 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Latex Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:


a. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc. b. NuFlex 330; NUCO Industries, Inc. c. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. d. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. e. Tremflex 834; Tremco.

2. Applications:

a. Interior joints in field-painted vertical and overhead surfaces at perimeter of hollow metal door frames; in gypsum drywall, plaster, and all other interior joints not indicated otherwise.


3.8 ACOUSTICAL JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:


a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corporation. b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; USG Corp., United States Gypsum Co.

2. Applications: Where indicated.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:


a. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Applications: Where indicated.

END OF SECTION

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Refer to the Structural drawings for wind pressures for exterior door assemblies.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel doors. 2. Steel door frames. 3. Impact-resistant door and frame assemblies.


1. Division 4 "Reinforced Unit Masonry" for installing anchors and grouting frames in masonry construction.

2. Division 8 "Finish Hardware" for door hardware and weather stripping. 3. Division 9 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot-grouting frames installed in steel-framed

gypsum board partitions. 4. Division 9 "Painting" for field painting factory-primed doors and frames.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details and finishes.

B. Exterior Doors and Frames: For exterior exposure doors and frames designed as impact-resistant and water infiltration resistant submit Miami-Dade County Product Approval – N.O.A.

C. Comply with the wind pressure requirements indicated in the structural drawings.


D. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames.


A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Conform to Florida building Code Latest Edition and to State of Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction, 1997 edition (Chapter 11- Florida Building Code) for installing work in conformance with ANSI A117.1.

C. Comply with wind pressure requirements as indicated in structural drawings.


A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames.

B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed.

C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Steel Doors and Frames:


a. Firedoor; Division of Ark II Manufactruring. b. Republic Builders Products. c. Curries Company; an Assa Alboy Group company. d. Next Door Corporation

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 568.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A60 (galvanealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

C. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143.

2.3 DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated.

B. Interior Doors: Provide flush doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:

1. Level 3 (0.053”) and Physical Performance Level A, (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).

C. Exterior Doors: Basis of design for exterior doors: Firedoor “Series 6070F” outswing commercial steel entrance door. N.O.A. No. 09-0923.10. Provide flush doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:

2. Level 4 (0.067”) and Physical Performance Level A (Maximum Duty), Model 2 (Seamless), galvanized for the wind pressures noted in the drawings.

3. All exterior impact resistant designated doors must have Miami-Dade County Product Control Approval – N.O.A. and comply the wind pressure requirements indicated on the structural drawings and water infiltration requirements.

D. Vision Lite Systems: Manufacturer's standard kits consisting of glass light moldings to accommodate glass thickness and size of vision light indicated.

2.4 FRAMES

A. General: Provide steel galvanized frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Frames of 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet for:


1. Level 3 steel doors.

C. Frames of 0.067-inch-thick steel sheet for:

1. Door openings wider than 48 inches. 2. Level 4 steel doors.

D. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames.

E. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch-thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation.

F. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch-thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch-diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 may be used in place of steel sheet. For impact-resistant doors, anchor per Miami-Dade County – N.O.A.

G. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.

B. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.067-inch-thick, metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges.

C. Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from the following material:

1. Cold-rolled steel sheet.

D. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying with SDI standards.

E. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.

F. Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Beveled edge.


G. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet (galvanealed coating).

I. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts.

J. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier and in compliance with Product Approval – N.O.A., for impact-rated doors. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.

K. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints at all masonry.

2. Fabricate knockdown, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. 3. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars.

L. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site.

M. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.

N. Vision (narrow) site: manufacturer’s standard construction and steel gauge.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified.

B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

1. Place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.


2. In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors.

3. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws.

4. For in-place gypsum board partitions, install knockdown, drywall slip-on frames.

C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G. 1. Impact-Resistant Doors: Install in strict compliance with N.O.A.


A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer.

B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.

END OF SECTION

FINISH HARDWARE 08710-1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION – 08710 – FINISH HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY:

A. This section includes securing and furnishing to the job site all Finish Hardware in accordance with this section and applicable drawings. It is intended that the following list of hardware cover all items required to complete the project. Omissions and/or discrepancies shall be brought to the Architects attention during the bidding period and, as needed, be corrected by addendum.

B. Items covered in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to:

Product Manufacturer

Closers LCN Cylinders Schlage Exit Devices (panic and fire) Von Duprin Hinges Ives Kick Plates Ives Latchsets Schlage Locksets Schlage Mutes Ives Pull Plates Ives Push Plates Ives Stops (wall) Ives Stops (Overhead) GJ Thresholds Pemko Weather Stripping Pemko

1.3 SPECIFIC OMISSIONS

A. Unless specifically noted otherwise in Hardware Groups hardware for the following is specified elsewhere.

1. Toilet Partitions and Rest Room accessories 2. Rough Hardware 3. Installation

1.4 RELATED SECTIONS AND DRAWINGS

Division 8 - Steel Doors and Frames


Architectural Drawings

1.5 REFERENCES:

A. State and Local Codes including Authority Having Jurisdiction.

B. ANSI 117.1 - Specifications for making Buildings and Facilities usable by Physically Handicapped People.

C. ANSI 156.18 - Materials and Finishes

D. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990

E. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Assoc.

F. NFPA - National fire Protection Assoc.

1. NFPA80 - Fire Doors and Windows 2. NFPA101 - Life Safety Code

G. UL - Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 2. UL305 - Panic Hardware

H. Warnock Hersey Inc.

I. SDI - Steel Door Institute

L. NAMM - National Assoc. of Architectural Metal Manufacturer’s

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Supplier to be a directly franchised distributor of the products to be furnished and have in their employ an AHC, Architectural Hardware Consultant, or person of equivalent experience, who is available for consultation to the Architect, Owner and General Contractor at reasonable times during the course of work.

B. Supplier, in concert with product Manufacturer, to provide pre installation training of jobsite personnel.

C. Obtain each category of hardware; (lockset, latchset, deadbolt, cylinder); (hinges); (closers), etc: from a single manufacturer.

D. Suppliers representative shall inspect completed project and certify, in writing to the Architect, that both hardware and installation is in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1.7 SUBMITTALS:


A. Submit 4 copies of vertically formatted Hardware Schedule in accordance with Section GC requirements.

B. Format Hardware Schedule into Hardware Groups to clearly identify each door and frame

with the following.

1. Unique number; Descriptive location; Size; Hand; Degree of swing.

C. List within Hardware Groups all items required for each door or pair of doors, including the following.

1. Quantity; Item description; Manufacturers catalog number;

Size: BHMA finish; Name of Manufacturer.

D. Furnish numerically sorted cross reference of door numbers to Hardware Groups.

E. Furnish 2 copies of catalog cuts for each item of hardware.

F. Furnish index and explanation of abbreviations, symbols and/or codes contained in Hardware Schedule.

G. Furnish chart of mounting heights and locations.

H. Provide physical samples of any items submitted as “approved alternates”.

I. Approval of Hardware Schedule will not relieve the suppliers responsibility of furnishing all hardware to complete the project.

1.8 COORDINATION:

A. Furnish templates and approved Hardware Schedule to respective material suppliers and trades to ensure accurate reinforcing and fitting of finish hardware.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND IDENTIFICATION:

A. Deliver, store and protect all items under provisions of General & Supplementary Conditions.

B. Inventory each delivery with hardware installer to assure accuracy of physical count against delivery documents.

C. Provide locked storage area protected from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, etc.

D. Package hardware items individually in manufacturers original cartons, clearly marked to indicate contents and cross referenced to Hardware Schedule.

1.10 MAINTENANCE:


A. Furnish any specialized tools and maintenance instruction manuals to Owner’s Representative.

B. Approximately six months after the acceptance of the building, the installer and representatives of the lock, closer, and exit device manufacturers shall return to inspect, assist and advise maintenance personnel of any deficiencies found in product performance.

1.11 WARRANTY:

A. Provide a one (1) year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship, commencing with substantial completion of the project. Extended warranties are specifically mentioned in each product category.

PART 2 PRODUCTS:

2.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Unless specifically noted otherwise in Hardware Sets the following manufacturers and product types have been selected to establish a level of quality. Acceptable alternates are noted at the end of each section.

2.2 FINISHES:

A. As noted in Hardware Sets and product description.

2.3 HINGES

A. As manufactured by Ives. Types, sizes and finishes as noted in Hardware Sets.

B. Provide shims and instructions for proper door adjustment.

B. Acceptable alternates: Stanley, Hager.

2.4 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS, RIM AND MORTISE CYLINDERS:

A. As manufactured by the Schlage Lock Company. Types, functions, designs and finishes as noted in Hardware Sets.

2.5 KEYS, KEYING:

A. All locks to be keyed and master keyed utilizing restricted Interchangeable core Everest keys and cylinders.

B. Supplier to meet with Owners Representative to determine keying requirements. Final instructions to be provided in writing.

C. All permanent cylinders shall be shipped directly to a representative of the Owner to be named.

D. Keys


1. 2 keys ea. individually keyed cylinder. 2. 4 total for ea. keyed alike group. 3. 4 Master keys for ea. master keyed set. 4. 15 Construction keys.

E. Construction Keying

1. Provide temporary keying during construction. 2. Key all construction cylinders alike.

3. At completion of work a representative of the Owner, in concert with the General Contractor, shall remove all construction cylinders replacing them with permanent one.

2.6 KEY CABINET:

A. Wall hung, sheet steel construction, gray baked enamel finish, piano hinged door with pin tumbler lock of brass construction, sized to retain all door and cabinet keys this project, plus 20%.

2.7 EXIT DEVICES:

A. As manufactured by Von Duprin. Types, functions and finishes as noted in Hardware Sets.

B. Doors with glass lites and/or applied moldings will require spacers to accommodate installation.

2.8 CLOSERS:

A. As manufactured by LCN. Types, sizes and finishes as noted in Hardware Sets. B. Mount parallel arm and away from public view where possible. C. Provide 10 year warranty.

2.9 PUSH, PULL, KICK PLATES

A. As manufactured by Ives.

B. Unless noted otherwise in Hardware Sets::

1. Pulls: 8103-10 2. Push Plates: 8200 Series 8 x 16

3. Pull Plates: 8300 Series: 8103 / 4 X 16 X Type F Mtg. 4. Kick Plates: 8400 Series: Single doors 6 X 2: LDW:

2.10 WALL AND FLOOR STOPS:

A. As manufactured by Ives. B. Types as noted in Hardware Sets. C. Contractor to provide solid blocking within stud space to receive wall stop attachment.


D. Acceptable alternates: Rockwood and Hager.

2.11 THRESHOLDS, WEATHER STRIPPING:

A. As manufactured by National Guard. Types and finishes as noted in door head, jamb and sill details.

B. Zero and Pemko are acceptable alternates.

2.12 MUTES:

A. As manufactured by Ives. B. Furnish on all doors except those with weather stripping and/or fire labels. C. Provide 3 on each single door and two on each pair of doors.

PART 3 EXECUTION:

3. 1 INSPECTION:

A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. Utilize instructions and templates provided with each item of hardware. B. Mounting heights from finished floor to center line of hardware item.

1. Locksets 38” 2. Deadbolts 48” 3. Exit Devices 38” 4. Push Pulls 42”

3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN:

A. Check and adjust the operation of each door and item of hardware to ensure their proper function. B. Final adjustments are to be made after all ventilating systems are in operation. C. Clean all hardware and adjacent surfaces after installation.

1. Instruct Owners personnel in adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes.

3.4 HARDWARE SETS:

Hardware Set No.1: “A” Door

1-1/2 pr Hinges Hager BB1168 x ss pin 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 USP 1 ea Lockset Schlage ND96PD 1 ea. Closer LCN 4111


3 ea Silencers Hager 307D 1 ea Floor Stop Hager

Hardware Set No.2: “B” Doors

1-1/2 pr Hinges Hager BB1168 x ss pin 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 USP 1 ea Lockset Schlage ND96PD 1 ea. Closer LCN 4111 1 ea Kick Plate Hager 214S BLK Plastic 16” x 34” 3 ea Silencers Hager 307D 1 ea Floor Stop Hager


PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior Portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath and solid-plaster bases. 2. Metal Framing.


1. Division 1 “Cutting and Patching”. 2. Division 4 “Reinforced Unit Masonry”. 3. Division 7 “Joint Sealants”. 4. Division 9 “Gypsum Board Assemblies”. 5. Division 9 “Painting” for painting of stucco.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Provide test reports from an independent laboratory employed by Contractor certifying that cement, sand aggregate, and other stucco mix components are free from contaminates. Submit copies of test reports to Owner.

C. Provide test reports from an independent laboratory employed by Contractor certifying that stucco application thickness complies with the specifications. Perform a minimum of two tests per floor. Submit copies of test reports to Owner.

D. Material Certificates: Submit producer’s certificate for each kind of stucco aggregate indicated evidencing that materials comply with requirements.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.



A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.

B. Exterior Plasterwork:

1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind.

2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F.

C. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental conditions for applying finishes.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C926 and Portland Cement Association (PCA) Plaster (Stucco) Manual.

B. Prospective contractor shall be a company with a minimum of 10 years experience in the application of Portland Cement Plaster.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 METAL LATH

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating with paper backing.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO). b. Marino/Ware; Division of Ware Industries, Inc. c. Phillips Manufacturing Co. d. Unimast, Inc. e. Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems.

2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring.

a. Weight: 3.4 lb/sq. yd.


B. Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I Grade B, Style 1a vapor-retardant paper.

1. Provide paper-backed lath at exterior locations.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.

B. Zinc and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Accessories:

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO). b. California Expanded Metal Products Company (CEMCO). c. Dale/Incor. d. Dietrich Industries, Inc. e. Phillips Manufacturing Co. f. Unimast, Inc.

2. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

3. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

4. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.

a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated.

b. Small nose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners. c. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated

stiffening rib; use on columns and for finishing masonry corners. d. Bull nose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch minimum, with expanded flanges; use

at locations indicated on Drawings.

5. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded flanges.

C. Plastic Lath and Accessories:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. UV resistant Plastic Lath and Accessories:

1) Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO). 2) Plastic Corporation, Inc. (PCI). 3) Approved Equal.



A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.

B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in Portland cement plaster.

C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.

1. Bonding Agent: Complying with ANSI/ASTM C 932. Non-re-emulsifying type – Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene. Color different from substrate.

2. PVA emulsion bonding agents are permitted for interior applications.

D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of not fewer than three exposed threads.

E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.

2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.

B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.

D. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed Portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents, and proprietary ingredients.

1. Available Products:

a. United States Gypsum Co.; Exterior Finish Stucco. b. ChemRex. c. Florida Stucco Corp.

2.6 PLASTER MIXES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.

1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. ft. of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability.

B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows:

1. Portland Cement Mixes:


a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 0 to 3/4 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material).

b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material).

c. Three-Coat Work Over Concrete Unit Masonry: Base coat as indicated below:

a) Scratch Coat: 1 part Portland cement, ¾ to 1-1/2 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts sand.

b) Brown Coat: 1 part Portland cement, ¾ to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts sand.

C. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Monolithic Concrete: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows:

1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 0 to 3/4 part lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material).

D. Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes:

1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part Portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material).

E. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For ready-mixed finish-coat plasters, comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering.

B. Prepare solid-plaster bases that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.

3.3 INSTALLING METAL LATH


A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.

1. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring diamond-mesh lath.

3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES

A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.

B. Reinforcement for External Corners and Dissimilar Material Interfaces:

1. Install lath-type external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 2. Install cornerbead at interior and exterior locations. 3. Install 6” strip of wire lath at interfaces between CMU and concrete.

3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.

1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface.

2. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.

B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases.

C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float as indicated on drawings and to match Architect's sample.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed.


A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from doorframes, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.

END OF SECTION

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board panels for ceilings and soffits. 2. Tile backing panels (cementitious backer units). 3. Non-load-bearing steel framing. 4. Exterior ceiling and soffit sheathing.


1. Division 7 “Joint Sealants”. 2. Division 9 “Porcelain Tile”.

1.3 Division 9 “Painting”.

A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



A. Certification for FRP Panels:

1. Meets USDA/FSIS requirements. 2. Class “A” per ASTM E-84. 3. UL Classified. 4. FRP does not support mold or mildew (per ASTM D3273 and ASTM D3274).



A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Steel Framing and Furring:

a. Clark Steel Framing Systems. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc. c. Dietrich Industries, Inc. d. Unimast, Inc.

2. Gypsum Board, Cementitious Backer Units, and Related Products:

a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum Corp. c. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Co.

2.2 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, 18 gauge wire.

C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: As follows:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency.


D. Hangers: As follows:

1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, 8 gauge.

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated.

F. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring 640 c. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System.

2.3 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Components, General: As follows:

1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with

ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0247 inch. Thickness to be increased as required to comply with limiting height requirements as shown on drawings. Refer to partition types on drawings for additional thickness requirements.

2. Depth: As indicated. 3. Use minimum 20 gauge metal studs at partitions scheduled to receive cementitious backer

units.

C. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/2 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, and minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0247 inch.

D. Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product fabricated to form 25 gauge, 1/2" x 2-1/2" channel.

E. Fasteners for Metal Framing: As recommended by manufacturer, of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

F. Reinforcement for grab bar, cabinet, wall mounted equipment, etc.: Minimum 18 gauge metal runner track-clip flanges. See detail on drawings.


2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.

B. Cementitious Backer Units.

1. “Durock” by USG or approved equal. 2. Core: 1/2”, regular type, or as otherwise indicated. 3. Install on minimum 20 gauge metal studs at 16” o.c. with approved fasteners as

recommended by the manufacturer. 4. To be used at all locations scheduled to receive tile and stone. 5. Deflection Limit: L/360.’

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed

panel edges. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where indicated. e. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated, or in compliance with USG manual. f. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. MM Systems Corporation

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), allow 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.

C. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:


a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. b. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings. c. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings.

d. Fry Reglet Corp. e. Gordon, Inc. f. MM Systems Corporation. g. Pittcon Industries.

3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5.

4. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: Alkali resistant tape for use with cementitious backer units, 2” wide,

polymer-coated, open glass fiber mesh.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:

1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping compounds.

2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by manufacturer.

E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping compounds.

2. Tile Backing Panels: Fill joints with tile-setting mortar or adhesive and then immediately embed tape and level joints. Use only materials approved by the panel manufacturer.

3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer.


2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:

a. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. Use 1-1/4” and 1-5/8” Durock Brand Steel Screws or approved equal for fastening cementitious backer units to steel framing.

C. Sound Attenuation Fire Batt: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), 4” minimum thickness produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength.

3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL


A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook."

C. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.

3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.

C. Wire-tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies indicated.

D. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacing indicated, but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards.

1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 24 inches o.c.

E. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

3.5 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction.


1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt-feltisolation strip between studs and wall.

B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.

C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.

1. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

D. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

E. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

G. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 16 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with

concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 16 inches o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

4. Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 10-inch staples fabricated from 0.0625-inch- diameter, tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member.

3.6 INSTALLING FIBEROCK SHEATHING

A. 5/8” fiberock sheathing fastened to MTL framing with exterior screws. Joints between panels shall be treated with sealant, DOW 795 silicone, or equal. Panels shall be fastened to metal stud framing at 16” o.c.


B. Gauge, fasteners, bracing, etc. shall be as per engineered shop drawings and calculations, signed and sealed by a Florida registered Engineer, to withstand the loads noted in the structural drawings or to comply with Code (ASCE 7-02).

3.7 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect concrete structural members projecting below underside of

floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4” to 1/2” wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

K. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended in writing by manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction.

L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.

1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications.


M. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c.

3.8 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS

A. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board.

b. At high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws

1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations.

2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.

D. Tile Backing Panels:

1. Cementitious Backer Unit: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

2. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in the same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.9 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

3.10 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.


B. Pre-fill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:

1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.

2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile.

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

PORCELAIN TILE 09310 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 09310 - PORCELAIN TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Porcelain tile. 2. Marble thresholds installed as part of tile installations.


1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates.

2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for tile backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on floors, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:

1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.60 (wet).

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Marble thresholds in 6-inch lengths.

C. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.


E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Instructions: for Installation and Maintenance.

G. Submit Friction test reports for each floor tile type prior to installation meeting or exceeding Performance Requirements in Article 1.4A and tested according to ASTM C 1028.


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or producer.

1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product:

1. Marble thresholds. 2. Joint sealants. 3. Cementitious backer board units.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated on drawings.

2. Floor Tile: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated on drawings.

3. Wall Tile: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated on drawings.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s standard one (1) year warranty from date of purchase stating that any of its manufactured products will be replaced if found to be defective.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each tile type is based on the products listed in drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by other manufacturers.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in

Part 1 "Definitions" Article.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.

C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements:

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. Arizona Tile. 2. Walker Zanger. 3. Metropolitan Ceramics.


4. Dal-Tile. 5. As indicated on drawings.

B. Porcelain Tile: Refer to drawings for product information.

2.4 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.

B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit height of bevel to ½ inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.

2.5 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. Bonsal, W. R., Company. 2. Bostik. 3. DAP, Inc. 4. Jamo Inc. 5. Laticrete International, Inc.

B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:

1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive.

a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

C. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.

D. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.

E. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as selected from manufacturers full color range.

F. Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as selected from manufacturers full color range.



A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer’s standard for each tile installation.

2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.

B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.


1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. 3. Seal floor slab at outdoor locations as indicated on the drawings.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

E. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:

1. For porcelain tile grouts (sand-Portland cement; dry-set, commercial Portland cement; and latex-Portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.

F. Where indicated on drawings, install tile backing boards units and treat joints to comply with and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.

G. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer’s written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:

1. Refer to drawings.


C. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Set thresholds in latex-Portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.

3.5 WALL TILE INSTALLATION

A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards.

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:

1. Refer to interior Design drawings.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all porcelain tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove epoxy grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

C. Cover all composite tile floors with heavy duty Kraft paper, masked in place to avoid stains or damage from construction traffic.

END OF SECTION

PAINTING 09912 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 09912 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces.

1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.

1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish, if scheduled.

C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. c. Light fixtures.

2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums c. Pipe spaces.

3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper and copper alloys. e. Bronze and brass.

4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators.


b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts.

5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, Miami-Dade County – N.O.A. or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

D. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames. 3. Division 7 Section “Sealants” 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum board.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter.

2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.

1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.

B. Qualification Data: For Applicator.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.


C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals.

1. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft.

2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate

coating systems of a similar nature.

3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.


A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F.

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F.

C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.


1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with extra paint materials in quantities indicated below: a. Exterior, Acrylic Paint: One case of each color applied. b. Exterior, Water-based, 100% acrylic waterproof coating. c. Interior, Latex Paint: One case of each color applied. d. All Other Paints: 1 gal. of each color and material.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s standard warranty against paint chipping, peeling, and fading.

B. Warranty period: 10 years from date of substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, use products from the following Manufacturer(s):

1. Sherwin Williams 2. BASF Thorocoat®3. Approved equal

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Concrete, Stucco (Portland Cement Plaster).


Primer- Thoro CM Primer First Coat- Thorocoat, water-based, high build, 100% acrylic waterproof coating (custom colors) Second Coat- Thorocoat, water-based, high build, 100% acrylic waterproof coating (custom colors)

B. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler:

Block Filler- Sherwin-Williams PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler 25W25 First Coat- Sherwin-Williams Loxon Top Coat Exterior Acrylic A24 Series Second Coat- Sherwin-Williams Loxon Top Coat Exterior Acrylic A24 Series

C. Ferrous Metal:

Primer- Sherwin-Williams Kem Kromic Unviersal Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1 First coat- Sherwin-Williams DTM Acrylic Coating gloss B66W100 Series Second Coat- Sherwin-Williams DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss B66W100 Series

D. Galvanized or Zinc-Coated Metal:

Primer- Sherwin-Williams DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish B66W1 (not required but recommended) First Coat- Sherwin-Williams DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss B66W100 Series Second Coat- Sherwin-Williams DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss B66W100 Series

2.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Concrete and Masonry (Other than Concrete Masonry Units):

Primer- Sherwin-Williams Loxon Interior Acrylic Latex Primer A28W300 First Coat- Sherwin-Williams ProMar 400 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss B31W400 Second Coat- Sherwin-Williams ProMar 400 Int. Latex Semi-Gloss B31W400

B. Concrete Masonry Units:

Block Filler- Sherwin-Williams PrepRite Int./Ext. Latex Block Filler B25W25 First Coat- Sherwin-Williams ProMar 400 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss B31W400 Second Coat- Sherwin-Williams ProMar 400 Int. Latex Semi-Gloss B31W400

C. Gypsum Board:

Primer- Sherwin-Williams PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 First Coat- Sherwin-Williams ProMar 400 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss B31W400 Second Coat- Sherwin-Williams ProMar 400 Int. Latex Semi-Gloss B31W400

D. Woodwork and Hardboard:

Primer- Sherwin-Williams PrepRite Wall & Wood Alkyd Primer B49W2 First Coat- Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss Enamel B35W200 Second Coat- Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss Enamel B35W200


E. Ferrous Metal:

Primer- Sherwin-Williams Kem Kromic Univ. Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1 Undercoat- Sherwin-Williams ProMar Alkyd Gloss Enamel B35W200 Finish Coat- Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss Enamel B35W200

F. Zinc-Coated Metal:

Primer- Sherwin-Williams DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish B66W1 Undercoat- Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss Enamel B35W200 Finish Coat- Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss Enamel B35W200

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application.

1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.

2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

1. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.


1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and

mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate

tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.

3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash

coat before priming. b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.

Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.

4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions

detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.


4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles.

7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match

exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional

coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is not required, unless noted otherwise.


F. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

G. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

H. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

I. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

J. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site.

1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

END OF SECTION

SIGNAGE 10431 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 10431 - SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Panel signs.


1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary Project identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs.

2. Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment.

3. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated Exit signs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, and graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.



A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1 and any other Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

1. Interior Code Signage: Provide signage as required by accessibility regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Illuminated Exit Signs: Refer to Division 16. b. Signs for Accessible Spaces.

D. Contractor is responsible for confirming and providing all Code required signage by the AHJ.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration of polymer finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image lamination.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).

2.2 PANEL SIGNS


1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. 2. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division. 3. Allen Industries Architectural Signage 4. Allenite Signs; Allen Marking Products, Inc. 5. APCO Graphics, Inc. 6. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 7. Best Sign Systems Inc. 8. Bunting Graphics, Inc. 9. Fossil Industries, Inc. 10. Gemini Inc. 11. Grimco, Inc. 12. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 13. InPro Corporation 14. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division. 15. Mills Manufacturing Company. 16. Mohawk Sign Systems. 17. Nelson-Harkins Industries. 18. Seton Identification Products. 19. Signature Signs, Inc. 20. Supersine Company (The)

B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:

1. Acrylic Sheet: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) thick. 2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 3. Corner Condition: Square. 4. Mounting: Unframed.

a. Wall mounted with two-face tape.

5. Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) above

surface with contrasting colors.


C. Exterior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:

1. Acrylic Sheet: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) thick. 2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 3. Corner Condition: Square. 4. Mounting: Unframed.

a. Manufacturer's standard noncorroding anchors for substrates encountered.

5. Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

D. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape.

1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet. 2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

E. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for five years for application intended.

1. Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.

1. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration.

2. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly.

3. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.


2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.6 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES

A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background and frame colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for five years for application intended.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, are sized and located to accommodate signs.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.

2. Hook-and-Loop Tapes: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 3. Magnetic Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 4. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces.


5. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above.

6. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.

7. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials.


A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Toilet and bath accessories.


1. Division 9 Section "Porcelain Tile" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified.

B. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices.

1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule and room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.


A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimensions, capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule.


1. Products of other manufacturers with equal characteristics, as judged solely by Architect, may be provided.

C. Conform to State of Florida Accessibility Code for Building, 1997 edition (Chapter 11-Part A, 2004 edition of Florida Building code) for installing work in conformance with ANSI A117.1.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: The accessories listed below shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal usage from the date of substantial completion for the periods set forth below:

1. Soap Dispensers: 3 years. 2. Other Accessories: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Toilet Room Accessories:

1. A&J Washroom Accessories. 2. American Specialties. 3. Baylor American Accessories. 4. Bobrick. 5. Gamco. 6. McKinney/Parker. 7. Meek Manufacturing Company, Fort Smith, AR. 8. Moore Dispensers.

B. Custodial Accessories:

1. Rubbermaid.


2. Accepted equivalent.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Toilet Paper Dispenser (#5):

1. Surface mounted, multi-roll, stainless steel with theft resistant spindles and tumbler lock keyed like other bathroom accessories.

2. Manufacturers:

a. A&J Washroom Accessories: Model U840. b. American Specialties: Model 0030. c. Baylor American Accessories: VT-5. d. Bobrick: Model B-288. e. Gamco: Model TTD-5. f. McKinney/Parker: Model 615.

B. Grab Bars (#1 & 1A):

1. Lengths and configurations as indicated on drawings and as specified in this section.

2. Heavy duty with peened non-slip gripping surface, 1-1/2" diameter, stainless steel, with 1-1/2" wall clearance and with theft-proof exposed fasteners.

3. Straddle bars, wall to floor with socket and horizontal grab bars according to manufacturer's model/series numbers.

4. Manufacturers:

a. A&J Washroom Accessories: UG Series. b. American Specialties: 3500 Series. c. Baylor American Accessories: Georgia Series. d. Bobrick: B-6106 Series. e. Gamco: 150 E Series. f. McKinney/Parker: 9705 Series.

C. Mirrors (#2):

1. Stainless steel frame, mirror polished, 20 gage stainless steel laminated to 1/2" tempered hardboard backing, with vandal resistant fasteners.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Bobrick: Model B-9436. b. Accepted equivalent.


D. Feminine Napkin/Tampon Disposal (#4):

1. Stainless steel, single surface-mounted, self-closing doors, with tumbler lock keyed like other bathroom accessories.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Bobrick: Models B-270. b. Accepted equivalent.

E. Soap Dispensers, Wall Mounted (#7):

3. Surface mounted, stainless steel container, liquid type, with refill indicator, and with 40 oz. stainless steel soap container and tumbler lock keyed like other bathroom accessories.

4. Manufacturers:

a. A&J Washroom Accessories: Model U124. b. American Specialties, Inc.: Model 0342. c. Baylor American Accessories: Model SD-58AP. d. Bobrick: Model B-4112. e. Gamco: G-58AP. f. McKinney/Parker: Model 304H.

E. Clothes Hook, Wall Mounted (#8):

1. Stainless steel with matte finish, 12 gauge bracket, 7 gauge hook, adjustable tension, vandal-resistant.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Bobrick: Models B-981. b. Accepted equivalent.

F. Paper Towel Dispenser with Waste Receptacle (#9 & 9A):

1. Stainless steel with satin finish, single surface-mounted or recessed.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Bobrick: Models B-369 (Recessed) & B-3699 (Surface-Mounted). b. Accepted equivalent.


G. Mop Racks:

1. 18” x 2 3/4" x 3 3/4" high handler wall racks, Model No. 1990 by Rubbermaid or accepted equivalent.

F. Tool Racks:

2. 36” x 2 3/4" x 3 3/4" high handler wall racks, Model No. 1991 by Rubbermaid or accepted equivalent.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.

C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180).

D. Chromium Plating: ASTM B456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal.

E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items.


B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

END OF SECTION

MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park Revised, December ?. 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED IN OTHER SECTIONS:

A. Shop drawings shall be fully coordinated with other trades before submittal. Contractor is warned that ceiling space is extremely limited in many areas. Extreme care and coordination amongst all trades is required for a successful installation.

B. Flashing (Except Cap Flashing For Fans, Ducts In This Section): Section 07600.

C. Painting of Exposed Surfaces: Section 09900.

D. Electrical Service, Wiring and Connections: Division 16.

1.3 This section applies to each mechanical section.

1.4 Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and work included in contract. Contractor shall follow drawing in laying out work; check drawings of all trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed, and maintain maximum headroom and working space conditions at all points. SEE REQUIREMENTS IN PARAGRAPH 1.06 FOR COMPOSITE COORDINATION DRAWINGS. Where headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, Architect-Engineer shall be notified before proceeding with installation. If directed by Architect-Engineer, contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of various trades or for proper execution of the work. Where variances occur between drawings and specifications, or within either document itself, the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity, or higher cost shall be included in contract price. Architect-Engineer shall decide on item and manner in which the work shall be installed. Prior to fabrication and/or installation, Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and calculations as indicated in other sections of the specifications.

1.5 STANDARDS AND CODES

A. All work shall comply with guidelines set in latest edition of following applicable standards and codes:

ADC - Air Diffusion Council. AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association. ANSI - American National Standards Institute. API - American Pipe Institute. ARI - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.


AWS - American Welding Society CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. FM - Factory Mutual. NBS - National Bureau of Standards. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association - National Fire Codes. OSHA - U.S. Dept. of Labor - Occupational Safety and Health Act Standards. PDI - Plumbing Drainage Institute. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. USAS - USA Standards. - Regulation of Electric Utility Concerning Electrical Installations. - Regulation of Florida Industrial Commission Regarding Safety. - Sanitary Code of the State Board of Health. FBC - Florida Building Code 2004. FMC - Florida Mechanical Code 2004. FPC - Florida Plumbing Code 2004.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. COORDINATION DRAWINGS

1. Prepare and submit for review composite coordination drawings consisting of color-coded plans, sections and elevations as may be necessary to indicate how all work described on the contract drawings, and shown by separate civil, structural, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection and electrical shop drawings is to be interfaced, intermeshed and sequenced for installation. Composite coordination drawings are also required to show all required installation, access and maintenance clearances. Coordination drawings shall be minimum 1/4” scale for plans, and 3/8” scale for sections and elevations. Architectural and structural background information included in final composite drawings shall be screened for clarity. Composite coordination drawings shall be CAD generated, developed by the respective contractors and not dimply overlays of the A-E’s contract drawings. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all work.

2. Composite coordination drawings are for the Contractor's use during construction and shall not be construed as replacing any shop drawing or other Project Record Document required by Contract Documents.

3. Composite coordination drawings are for the Contractor’s use as a means of pre-installation conflict resolution, and to facilitate the orderly and efficient execution of the work. No extra compensation will be paid for the removal and relocation of any duct, pipe, conduit, other construction element that has been installed without proper coordination between all of the trades involved.

4. The A-E’s review of composite coordination drawings, and any comments or suggestions developed by the A-E shall not relieve Contractor from overall responsibility for coordination of work performed pursuant to Contract or from other requirements of Contract.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS:

1. Submit shop drawings per procedures indicated in Section 01340. Additionally, submission of equipment and materials shall be as indicated hereinafter under Mechanical - Division 15.

2. Submit shop drawings at one time, inserted in one loose leaf binder, with tabs and index. Follow the same procedure for HVAC, Fire Protection and Plumbing using a separate binder


for each of the four items. 3. All individual submittal sheets inserted in said binder must be clearly marked and referenced

to proper paragraph and subparagraph of specifications. 4. Cross out any items on sheets which constitute information not pertaining to equipment

specified. 5. Clearly mark all components which are provided as "optional" by manufacturer and required

hereinafter. 6. Failure in compliance with any one of the above may result in nonacceptance of shop

drawings.

C. Provide the following for products listed in this section:

1. Access Panels: Catalog cuts. 2. Motors: Shop drawings, electrical data; wiring diagrams. 3. Starters and Combination Starter-Disconnects: Shop drawings; electrical data; interlock

schedule; number of auxiliary contacts, wiring diagrams. 4. Valve Tags: Shop drawings with proposed nomenclature and numbering. 5. Nameplates: Shop drawings; list of nameplates. 6. Pipe Identification: Shop drawings; nomenclature, color code. 7. Ductwork Identification: Shop drawings; nomenclature; color code. 8. Pipe-Corrosion Coating: Catalog cuts. 9. Fire-Retardant Caulking Compound: Catalog cuts.

1.7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Operating and maintenance manual instructions shall be provided for all mechanical equipment and systems as hereinafter specified.

B. Operating and maintenance manual will be used for training of and use by the Owner's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the mechanical systems. The manuals must therefore address itself not only to equipment but also to the operation of the systems. Furnish manuals as indicated hereinafter.

C. Format of the manuals shall be based on a separate manual or chapter for each class of system as follows:

1. Fans and Ventilating Equipment. 2. Plumbing Equipment.

D. Content of each chapter of manual shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Description of system. 2. Operating sequence and procedure.

a. Step-by-step procedure for system start-up, including a pre-start checklist. Refer to controls and indicators by nomenclature consistent with that used on panels and in control diagrams.

b. Detailed instruction in proper sequence, for each mode of operation (i.e., day-night; staging of equipment).

c. Emergency Operation: If some functions of the equipment can be operated while other functions are disabled, give instructions for operations under these conditions. Include here only those alternate methods of operations (from normal) which the


operator can follow when there is a partial failure or malfunctioning of components, or other unusual condition.

d. Shutdown Procedure: Include instructions for stopping and securing the equipment after operation. If a particular sequence is required, give step-by-step instructions in that order.

e. Manual Mode: Additionally, a complete sequence of operation shall be provided for a manual mode situation.

3. Maintenance instructions and requirements shall be divided into two primary categories: Preventive maintenance and corrective maintenance.

4. Preventive Maintenance: a. Provide a schedule for preventive maintenance. State, preferably in tabular form, the

recommended frequency of performance for each preventive maintenance task. Cleaning, inspection and scheduled overhauls.

b. Cleaning: Provide instructions and schedules for all routine cleaning and inspection with recommended lubricants.

c. Inspection: If periodic inspection of equipment is required for operation, cleaning or other reasons, indicate the items to be inspected and give the inspection criteria for: motors; controls; filters and any other maintenance items.

d. Provide instructions for minor repairs or adjustments required for preventive maintenance routines. Identify test points and give values for each.

5. Corrective Maintenance: a. Corrective maintenance instructions shall be predicated upon a logical effect-to-cause

troubleshooting philosophy and a rapid replacement procedure to minimize equipment downtime.

b. Troubleshooting: Troubleshooting tables, charts, or diagrams shall be used to present specified procedures. A guide to this type shall be a three column chart. The columns shall be entitled: Malfunction, Probable Cause and Recommended Action.

c. Repair and Replacement: Indicate repair and replacement procedures most likely to be required in the maintenance of the equipment.

d. Safety Precautions: This subsection shall comprise a listing of safety precautions and instructions to be followed before, during and after making repairs, adjustments, or routine maintenance.

6. Manufacturers' brochures: This subsection shall include manufacturers' descriptive literature covering devices and equipment used in the system, together with illustrations, exploded views and renewal parts lists. Manufacturer’s standard brochures shall be corrected so that information applying to the actual installed equipment is clearly defined.

E. Submittal of two draft copies of the complete operating and maintenance manual shall be made for review by the Architect-Engineer within 120 calendar days after review of mechanical equipment shop drawings. One copy will be returned to the Subcontractor within 30 days after receipt by the Architect-Engineer.

1. Submit four (4) copies of final operating and maintenance bound in 5 ring binders with tabs and index at least thirty (30) days prior to the final acceptance inspection.

1.8 Record Drawings: As per procedures indicated in General Conditions.

1.9 TRAINING


A. The Contractor shall train the Owner's representative(s) in the operation and maintenance of all mechanical equipment and systems. Contractor shall provide all necessary training materials and manuals.

B. Coordination shall be maintained with the Architect-Engineer in the development of training techniques and materials. Thirty days prior to commencement of training program, submit for review the proposed training schedule and scope of materials and techniques to be covered.

C. Training and instructions shall occur after the project final inspection and utilize the operating and maintenance manuals.

D. Minimum Owner Instruction Period: After all balancing and testing has been completed, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to operate the systems for a period of not less than one (1) full eight hour day, in the presence of the Owner's representatives for the purpose of instruction in operation and maintenance. Authorized representatives of all major equipment shall be present as required during this instructional period. The Architect/Engineer may be present at the beginning of the instructional period to assure that proper instruction and training is being performed.

E. Furnish three (3) copies of a signed acknowledgement that the Owner's representative(s) have received the specified training.

1.10 SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Substitution acceptance as per Division 0 and 1.

B. Contractor shall be fully responsible for coordinating space requirements, duct and piping layout, pipe hanger type and arrangement, mounting arrangement, service connections and clearances etc., when a substitute equipment is furnished instead of the one used as a basis for design.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for any expenses generated by substitution of equipment used as a basis for design.

1.11 MANUFACTURERS NAMEPLATES

A. Each major component of equipment to have manufacturer's name, address, model number and rating on a plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place. Nameplate of a distributing agent will not be acceptable in lieu of manufacturer's nameplate. Nameplate shall be die stamped, engraved, or etched to guarantee long term legibility.

1.12 GUARANTY/WARRANTY

A. Equipment: Manufacturer's standard warranty, minimum one year from date of final acceptance of all work.

B. A full service and maintenance warranty shall be provided for a period of one year after acceptance by the owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. All equipment shall be of the type and capacity shown on the equipment schedules in the drawings, or specified herein. Equipment shall be as manufactured by one of the manufacturers designated on this specification or shall be an equivalent; reviewed by the Architect-Engineer.

B. For ease of maintenance and parts replacement, equipment from a single manufacturer shall be used to the maximum extent possible.

2.2 Materials: Materials shall be new, free from defects and of the accepted standard of weight and grade, or heavier, as hereinafter specified.

2.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's original unopened containers clearly labeled with manufacturer's name, brand designation and reference specification. Damage sustained by products in transit to job site shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect-Engineer. If damage sustained while transporting products to job site is unrepairable, the products shall be replaced with new ones at no cost to owner.

B. Storage: Store and protect materials and equipment in a way that will preclude damage of any kind. Keep materials dry at all times. Exposed metal surfaces shall be protected with a light oil or silicone coating to prevent rust while in storage.

C. Handling: Handle products in such a manner as to prevent breakage of containers and damage of any kind.

D. Schedule delivery of materials to job site in accordance to requirements of job progress so as not to delay the work.

2.4 Motors and Starters: Furnish motor driven equipment complete with motors, drives, associated controls and remote pilot devices required to perform the specific function for which it is intended.

A. Starters: Furnish manual or magnetic starters under the Mechanical Sections for installation under Division 16. Refer to note below defining the requirements for combination starters/disconnects. Magnetic starters shall be installed under Division 16, see drawings. Motor starters as manufactured by Cutler Hammer, Allen Bradley, General Electric or equivalent, shall meet the following requirements:

1. Overload protection on each phase and external to motor overloads with snap-on type connections.

2. Each starter with red and green indicating lights in the cover. 3. H-O-A switches in cover for all equipment that is automatically or remotely started or

stopped. 4. Provide necessary auxiliary contacts (minimum of (2) N.O. and (2) N.C.). 5. Control circuit shall be 24 or 120 volt derived from a suitable sized transformer in each

individual starter, one leg grounded and one leg fused or from a separate building circuit. 6. Enclosures: Starters not exposed to weather- NEMA Type 1 enclosures. Weather exposed

units- NEMA Type 3R enclosures. 7. Each starter shall have an engraved plastic nameplate on the outside cover and an overload


heater schedule on the inside cover. 8. Each starter shall be clearly labeled with name of equipment for which is intended as

designated on drawings.

NOTE: Except where packaged units include separate "Line side - Insight Disconnect Means", motor starter shall be of the combination switch type employing quick make - quick break mechanisms with locking means (in open position), refer to Section 16481, "Motor Controllers" and Section 16476, "Disconnects and Circuit Breakers for additional specific requirements.

B. Motors: Ball bearing or sleeve bearing type, NEMA rated of sufficient size for the duty to be performed, and not to exceed their full rated load when the driven equipment is operating at specified capacity under the most severe condition encountered. Unless otherwise specified or scheduled, motors shall have open framed, Class B insulation, and continuous duty classification based on a 40 degree C ambient temperature with a 1.15 service factor rating. Select motors for quiet operation. Furnish Westinghouse, Gould, US Motors, or Allis Chalmers or equivalent; meeting the following requirements:

1. Motors to be NEMA Class B with normal starting torque and low starting current unless otherwise noted.

2. Motors inside buildings to be dripproof or as indicated on drawings. Motors exposed to weather to be T.E.F.C. or as indicated on drawings.

3. Motors shall be capable of starting unit served every hour after a ten minute off period. 3. Motors shall be rated as "high efficiency" and shall as a minimum meet the efficiency levels

established by the EPAct Standard (Environmental Protection Agency).

2.5 Valve Identification Tags: All valves regardless of size shall have brass tags at least 2 inches round in size and 0.051 inch thick. Legend shall be stamped in letters at least 1/4 inch high and shall include function of valve, normal position, fluid conveyed and valve number. Fasten tags to valves with brass chains. Provide valve list.

2.6 Nameplates: Shall be aluminum with black enamel background, with etched or engraved natural aluminum lettering 1 inch high, attached to equipment with screws or rivets. Plates shall be as manufactured by Seton Name Plate, Inc., or approved equal.

2.7 Fire Retardant Caulking Compound: Required for sealing caulked ducts openings and pipe sleeves, Dow Corning RTV Silicone Foam or equivalent.

2.8 Corrosion Coating: Nokorode Seal-Coat (standard) manufactured by Lion Oil Co., El Dorado, Arkansas, or equivalent.

2.9 Sleeves: Shall be 18 gauge mill galvanized sheet metal or Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe as noted.

2.10 Floor and Ceiling Plates: Shall be stainless steel, 1 inch split ring type. Provide deep dish type over extended floor sleeves.

2.11 Access Panels: Shall be manufactured by Inryco (Milcor), Boico, Karp, or equivalent. Panels shall be furnished with locks operable with a single key. Panels shall be as follows:

A. Plaster Ceiling: Inryco (Milcor) Style K.


B. Drywall Surface and Masonry Walls: Inryco (Milcor) Style M.

C. Fire Rated Surfaces: Inryco (Milcor) UL fire rated door.

D. Acoustical Ceiling: Inryco (Milcor) Style AT.

E. Panels: Shop-painted 1 coat zinc chromate primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Qualification of Installers: For the actual fabrication installation, and testing of work under this division, use only thoroughly trained and experienced workmen, completely familiar with the items to be installed and the manufacturers' current recommended methods of installation.

B. Welding: All welding shall be performed by certified welders. Electric arc welding shall be performed using electrodes conforming with AWS A5.1-69, Classification E6010. Each layer shall be cleaned. Chip out trapped slag and unfused areas before applying next bead. Finished weld shall be visually inspected for cracks, porosity or imperfections. If the weld contains any defects, it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect-Engineer. Refer to Section 15050 for additional information and/or requirements.

3.2 HOUSEKEEPING

A. Each trade is responsible for keeping stocks of materials and equipment stored on premises in a neat and orderly manner.

B. Each trade to clean and maintain its portion of the work. Contractor shall be responsible to enforce the cleaning operation in accordance with the General Conditions.

C. Exposed surfaces of piping, ductwork or equipment which have become covered with dirt, plaster or other material during handling and construction are to be thoroughly cleaned by erecting mechanical trade before such surfaces are covered with insulation, prepared for painting or enclosed within the building structure.

D. Each trade to keep its respective pipe and duct openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter and cover fixtures, equipment and apparatus as required to protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Any such fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the work shall be restored to its original condition or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to DCAD.

3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. Excavation and backfilling of trenches required for installation of utility services and underground piping within building and to points of connection with exterior underground utilities outside of building shall be performed by each mechanical trade for its work as specified. Provide separate trenches for water and sewer lines. Follow requirements of Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction - Section 02221.


B. Each mechanical trade is responsible for pumping and draining of trenches or pits necessary for installation of its work.

C. Backfilling: Do not backfill trenches until piping has been tested and reviewed by Architect-Engineer and any local authorities having jurisdiction thereof.

3.4 PIPING AND DUCTWORK INSTALLATION

A. Give careful consideration to clearance under beams, cranes, platforms, monorails, etc., to provide maximum headroom in all cases, and to locations of lines and type of fittings used to obtain these clearances. Coordinate piping, ductwork, lighting trades and other trades with each other, and with other equipment.

B. Lines and Levels: Each mechanical trade is responsible for levels of ductwork and piping based on reference lines and bench marks established by Contractor for general work.

3.5 SETTING AND ALIGNMENT OF EQUIPMENT

A. Set unattached electric motors in place under this division for connection under Electrical - Division 16.

B. Fan and motor pulleys shall be carefully aligned and belt tension shall be properly adjusted in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.

3.6 HOISTS, RIGGING TRANSPORTATION AND SCAFFOLDING

A. Provide scaffolding, staging, cribbing tackle, hoists and rigging necessary for placing materials and equipment in their proper places on project. Remove temporary work from premises when no longer required.

3.7 FOUNDATION AND SUPPORTS

A. Contractor shall provide anchor bolts, slab inserts, supports, cradles, saddles, hangers and sleeves for piping, conduit equipment, etc. This work must be coordinated among all trades prior to commencing work.

3.8 BELT AND COUPLING GUARDS

A. Provide guards for belt-driven units and at chains, gears, couplings, keys, projecting set screws and other rotating or moving parts. Belt guards to enclose both pulleys and belts on exposed sides. Provide coupling guards on direct-connected units. Design guards for easy removal for service and comply with Underwriters' and OSHA safety requirements.

3.9 ACCESS PANELS

A. Furnish access panels and turn-over for setting under general construction work. Arrange piping and ductwork so concealed valves, control dampers and equipment can be freely maintained or operated through access panels. Direct location and setting of access panels. Provide access panels so they are not obtrusive. Panels shall be architecturally suitable for rooms installed therein. Access panels sized at 12 inches x 12 inches unless larger sizes are required for ease of


access and furnished with locks. All locks shall be operable with a single key.

3.10 SLEEVES

A. Layout the work in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. Furnish and set in place sleeves necessary to complete the work.

B. Floor Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with bottom end flush with surface, top end extended 1 inch above finished floors. Caulk with glass wool and seal at top and bottom with firestopping compound.

C. Foundation Walls Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, flush inside and outside; caulk with oakum and silicone foam.

D. Masonry and Concrete Wall Sleeves: Standard weight galvanized steel pipe, flush with wall surface at both ends; caulk with glass wool and seal at both faces with firestopping compound.

E. Interior Partitions and Ceilings: 20 gauge galvanized steel sleeves with lock joints; pack with glass wool and caulk at both faces with silicone foam, or with firestopping compound at rated construction.

3.11 CHASES AND OPENINGS

A. Provide to masonry and concrete trades, templates or details for chases and opening to be left in floors, walls, and partitions to accommodate the work for each mechanical trade.

3.12 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES

A. On exposed pipes passing through floors, walls, partitions, plaster, furring, etc., provide plates at visible sides of openings. In finished rooms, plates to be chrome plated; in unfinished rooms, plates to be prime coated.

3.13 PROTECTIVE COATING AND PAINTING FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A. Painting of exposed piping and mechanical/electrical equipment shall be provided under Painting - Section 09900, with exception of coating of concealed piping and hangers specified herein.

B. Uninsulated Piping Exposed to Weather: Apply one coat of coal tar primer and two coats of coal tar enamel.

C. Insulated Piping Exposed to Weather: Before insulation is applied, apply one coat of coal tar primer and one coat of coal tar enamel before covering with insulation.

D. Insulated Piping and Not Exposed to Weather: No further finish required except as specified below and on exposed insulation per Painting - Section 09900.

E. Damaged Factory Coating: Other black steel pipe not exposed to weather where factory coating has been damaged by cutting, handling or other reasons, touch up with one coat coal tar enamel.

F. Uninsulated piping interior, exposed, as per Painting - Section 09900.


G. Uninsulated Piping, Concealed: One coat of coal tar primer.

H. All Piping and Hangers, Except Uninsulated Exposed Piping: One coat of corrosion coating specified herein. Palm apply to a minimum of 1/32 inch thick. Do not coat galvanized, copper or plastic piping.

I. Piping identification and flow markings as scheduled herein.

J. All copper tubing insulation shall be painted with Benjamin Foster "Lagtone" vinyl paint or equivalent.

K. Clean all surfaces to be coated in accord with applicable provisions specified in Painting - Section 09900.

3.14 Not Used.

3.15 CLEANING

A. Ductwork: Remove foreign material and especially clean ducts including dust in vicinity of openings before grilles and registers are installed. Refer to Cleaning and Sanitizing section for additional information.

B. Before testing and balancing is started, the following steps must be executed:

1. Ascertain that all equipment has a visible nameplate with information specified hereinbefore.

3.16 STERILIZATION

A. Flushing: After piping installation has been completed, the entire domestic water piping system throughout the building shall be flushed with clear water at the highest velocity obtainable and for a sufficient time to replace the pipe volume at least twice.

B. Sterilization

1. Procedures: All piping, valves, service connections, meters, hydrants, and all items to come in contact with domestic water shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with the requirements of this section of the specifications. The sterilizing agent shall be either liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution, or a solution made from hypochlorite powder, such as HTH. Chlorine shall be introduced into the piping system or facilities to be sterilized, in amounts sufficient to provide a minimum concentration of seventy five parts per million (75 ppm) throughout the system.

C. Sterilization/Bacterial Tests

1. Procedures: The entire domestic water piping systems including existing systems, shall be introduced with the sterilizing agent immediately beyond the point or points of connection to the water main. The sterilizing agent shall remain in the piping system or facilities for a minimum contact period of eight hours before it is flushed out. After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until residual chlorine tests are less than 0.2 ppm. Such tests shall be in accordance with standard methods by the use of a


standard orthotolodine test set. 2. Bacterial Tests: Upon completion of the work of sterilization and flushing described above,

samples of water shall be taken from the remote points of the system, on two consecutive days. Samples shall be forwarded to the County Health Department for bacterial examination. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, sterilization shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be completed before the system is placed in operation.


CODES AND STANDARDS 15023 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 15023 - CODES AND STANDARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. Comply with the following:

1. Florida Building Code (FBC). 2. Florida Building Code (FGC) - Gas. 3. Florida Building Code (FMC) - Mechanical. 4. Florida Building Code (FPC) - Plumbing. 5. National Electrical Code - 1999 (NFPA 70). 6. National Fire Protection Association - 1997 (NFPA). NFPA 101 and other NFPA codes as

applicable, except NFPA 101 10-2.2.7 and 10.2.2.7 Exit Passageways and where exceeded by SREF.

7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A117.1, 1995. 8. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-98.9. Chapter 10D of the Florida Administrative Code. 10. Florida Energy Efficiency Code for Building Construction (FEEC).


A. Where materials and equipment are available under the continuing inspection and listing service of Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), furnish materials and equipment so listed.

PART 2 NOT USED

PART 3 NOT USED


IDENTIFICATION 15047 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park Revised, December ?, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 15047 - IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Identification including necessary accessories indicated on Construction Documents and specified in this section or as required for proper identification of equipment and piping.


1. 02221 – Excavating, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities. 2. 15410 - Piping (Plumbing). 3. 15510 - Piping (HVAC)

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit properly identified product and technical data including printed installation instructions before starting work.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Color Coding: ANSI Z535.1 (latest edition) shall take precedence over any discrepancies in determining proper color code identification.

2. Conform to the standards established in ANSI A13. 3. Comply with OSHA standards.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify equipment served by piping systems by number or legend as shown on Construction Documents.

B. Engraved Plastic Name Plates: Provide engraved laminated plastic name plates with 1 inch high letters on equipment cabinets.

C. Brass Tags: Provide appropriate sized brass tags on equipment where cabinets do not exist.

D. Valve Identification: Identify location and system under valve control with a color coded thumb tack under valve and lay-in ceiling tile.

E. Underground Tapes:

1. Electrical Warning Tape: 6 mil, 3 inches wide polyethylene.


a. BURIED ELECTRICAL LINE BELOW - No.37236 by Seton or accepted equivalent.

2. 2" Metallic Detection Tapes:

a. BURIED SEWER LINE BELOW - No.37220 by Seton or accepted equivalent. b. BURIED WATER LINE BELOW - No.37222 by Seton or accepted equivalent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry before application of identification signage.

3.02 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS - IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify mechanical systems in accordance with ANSI A13.1 - scheme for the identification of piping systems and as follows:

B. Piping: All new and existing piping shall receive new paint. All existing piping shall be cleaned, remove rust, sanded, primed and prepared to receive new paint as specified herein after.

1. All interior exposed piping shall be fully painted as per Section 09900 - Painting, and as per color code shown in this section of the specifications.

2. All exterior exposed piping shall be fully painted as per Painting Section 09900. Color shall be as indicated on the color schedule.

3. All interior piping, concealed and exposed of pipe sizes under 4 inches, shall be identified showing contents and direction of flow by an arrow, using stenciled painting. Labels shall be applied as follows:

a. At each vertical and horizontal change in direction. b. Behind each access door. c. Not more than 20 feet apart in straight runs. d. Where pipes pass through a wall, provide labels on both sides of the wall.

Size of labels and letters shall meet ANSI A13.1 requirements as indicated on detail on drawings. Color codes shall be as per Paragraph 3-16C with black letters. For pipe sizes 4 inches and over labels shall be provided with stenciled black or white lettering. Pipe sizes less than 4 inches in size may use pressure sensitive vinyl labels as manufactured by W.H. Brady Company, Seton Nameplate Corporation, or equivalent.

C. Piping Identification Materials:

1. Identify contents and flow direction of piping or pipes wrapped with insulation by using:


a. Brady B-946 self sticking vinyl. b. Champion America Inc., pressure sensitive vinyl.c. Seton Opti-Code. d. Ready Made adhesive pipe markers.

D. Valves: Provide bronze tags for all valves with identification as to type of service, in accordance with symbol list and color as specified under paragraph hereinbefore with a sequential number system.

E. Identification Chart and Diagram:

1. Charts and diagrams shall be photographic or equivalent non-fading reproductions. Framed, wall mounted charts and diagrams shall be covered with 1/8 inch thick clear glass or acrylic plastic.

2. Provide framed, wall mounted identification chart plastic giving complete list of applicable piping identification symbols with system description and pipe color code identification system at mechanical room.

3. Provide a valve chart and insert it in the operation and maintenance manual. Valve chart shall include valve location, valve service and valve number. Format shall be reviewed by Architect-Engineer.

4. Provide framed, wall mounted consolidated system diagrams for each air handling, heating and refrigeration systems. Post diagrams at each respective area and/or as instructed by Architect/Engineer.

F. Nameplates for Mechanical Equipment: Shall identify equipment and its function.

1. Nomenclature and equipment numbers shall correspond to those used in preparation of posted operating instructions.

2. Following items shall receive nameplates minimum 1" x 2-1/2".

a. Pilot lights. b. Panel mounted gauges, instruments and meters. c. Starters. d. Switches and pushbuttons.

3. Following items shall receive nameplates minimum 2" x 4":

a. Air handling units (PC-Air and standard). b. Fans. c. Pumps. d. Air compressor. e. Chiller. f. Expansion tanks. g. Fire protection equipment.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Brass Tags or Engraved Plastic Name Plates:

1. Install brass tags or engraved plastic name plates according to manufacturer's


instructions.

a. Place brass tags or name plates in locations easily visible within the space at normal eye level or as otherwise directed by A/E.

B. Piping Markers and Directional arrows:

1. Location:

a. Pipes Passing Through Walls: Provide pipe markers and directional arrows on the pipe on each side of the wall.

b. Pipes Behind Access Doors/Panels: Provide pipe markers and directional arrows within view.

c. Continuous Run Pipe Lines: Provide pipe markers and directional arrows at intervals not exceeding 50 feet.

d. Risers and �T� Joints: Provide pipe markers and directional arrows at each riser and �T� joint.

e. Vertical and Horizontal Change of Direction: Provide pipe markers and directional arrows at each vertical and horizontal change of direction.

2. Special Requirements:

a. Directional Arrows: When identifying by directional arrows, point arrow head away from pipe markers and in the direction of flow.

1) Direction of Flow: If the flow can be in both directions, identify by using double-headed directional arrows.

b. Thin Film Pipe Markers and Thin Film Directional Arrows: When using both thin film pipe markers and thin film directional arrows on soft insulation, provide a spiral wrap of accepted pipe banding tape around the pipe as foundation for both markers and directional arrows.

C. Underground Tapes:

1. Electrical Warning Tape: Install warning tape 8 inches below finish grade on all underground outside electrical lines.

2. 2" Metallic Detection Tapes: Install metallic detection tape 4 inches to 6 inches below finish grade on all underground outside plumbing and air-conditioning lines.


VALVES, COCKS AND FAUCETS 15100 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 15100 - VALVES, COCKS AND FAUCETS (PLUMBING)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 Division 0 and Division 1 apply.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Valves: Catalog cuts and pressure ratings.

B. Hose Bibbs: Catalog cuts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VALVES

A. Gate Valves (Water System):

1. Two and one-half inches and smaller shall be bronze body, screwed bonnet, non-rising stem, solid wedge, class 125, 200 psi non-shock water MSS SP-80.

a. Threaded end: Nibco T-113, Hammond, Stockham or approved equal. b. Soldered end: Nibco S-11B Hammond or Stockham, or approved equal.

2. Three inches and larger shall be flanged ends, iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, wedge disc MSS-SP-70. Nibco F-619, Stockham, Hammond or approved equal).

B. Globe Valves: Bronze construction, screwed bonnet, rising stem, class 125 psi, 200 psi non-shock water. MSS SP-80.

1. Threaded ends to 3 inches: Nibco T-211, Hammond or Stockham approved equal. 2. Soldered ends to 3 inches: Nibco S-211, Hammond or Stockham approved equal.

C. Ball Valves:

1. Ball Valves, ¼ to 4 Inch: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 400 psi WOG pressure; two-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B62 full port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends for domestic hot and cold water service. Nibco SF B-600.

D. Check Valves:

1. Two inches and smaller shall be bronze body, Y pattern, screwed cap, bronze disc, swing


type, class 125 psi, 200 psi non-shock. MSS SP-80.

a. Threaded Ends: Nibco T-413, Hammond or Stockham approved equal. b. Soldered end: Nibco-413, Hammond No. 1B-941 or Stockham approved equal.

2. Two-inch larger Nibco T-433 threaded and TS-433 solder class 150 psi.

2.2 HOSE BIBBS

A. Interior; Concealed Supply: Flanged all brass, chrome plated 3/4 inch angle hose valve Chicago No. 952, T & S Brass acceptable equivalent with non-removable vacuum breaker. Provide isolation valve in branch.

B. Vacuum breaker shall be non-removable type with finish to match hose bibb; Watts 8A Regulator, or acceptable equivalent.

C. Exterior: Rough chromium plated flanged brass ¾ inch (20 mm) angle hose valve Chicago Faucet No. 387, T & S Brass or acceptable equivalent with lockshield, removable key handle, and vacuum breaker. Provide with isolation valve in branch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior through the end ports for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine functionally significant features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation. Following examination, return the valve closure member to the shipping position.

C. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (i.e., out-of-round or local indentation) and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.

E. Prior to valve installation, examine the piping for cleanliness, freedom from foreign materials, and proper alignment.

F. Replace defective valves with new valves.

3.2 VALVE ENDS SELECTION

A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 1. Copper Tube Size, 2-Inch and Smaller: Solder ends. 2. Copper Tube Sizes 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: flanged.


3.3 VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A. General Application: Use gate and ball valves for shut-off duty; ball for throttling duty. Refer to piping system specification sections for specific valve applications and arrangements.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment arranged to allow equipment removal without system shutdown. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.

E. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

3.4 SOLDER CONNECTIONS

A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.

B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket in same manner.

C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.

D. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.

E. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.

3.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS

A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

B. Align threads at point of assembly.

C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads.

D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.

3.6 FLANGED CONNECTIONS

A. Align flange surfaces parallel.

B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.


3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing, inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valves if leak persists.


A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare valves to receive finish painting or insulation.


THERMAL INSULATION (PLUMBING) 15260 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 15260 - THERMAL INSULATION (PLUMBING)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Thermal insulation (Plumbing) including necessary accessories.


1. 15410 - Piping (Plumbing).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit properly identified Manufacturer's literature to the form defined in Section 01340 before commencing work.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Insulation Materials: Catalog Cuts and Performance Data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Armstrong.

B. Manville.

C. Owens Corning.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Insulation: Type and thickness as specified.

1. Insulation, including adhesives, shall be either fire retardant or self-extinguishing. 2. Finishing jackets, insulation and adhesives shall have composite fire and smoke ratings per

ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723.

B. Insulation Type A shall have a minimum density of 1 pound per square foot, minimum thermal conductivity of 0.29K factor and a rated service temperature range of -40 degrees Fahrenheit to 220 degrees Fahrenheit.

1. Flame Spread: 10 or less.


2. Smoke Developed: 40 or less. 3. Accessories (adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes for fittings and the like) shall have same

composite ratings as listed above.

C. Insulation Type B shall have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.26K factor at 70 degrees F. mean temperature, density of 5-6 pounds per cubic foot and a water vapor transmission of 0.1 perms.

D. Tape: As recommended by the insulation manufacturer; otherwise provide Minnesota Mining Adhesive EC-1329.

E. Insulating Cement: All-purpose Mineral Wool cement Keene Powerhouse, Benjamin Foster or Fibrex FBX fast set.

F. Glass Cloth Jacket: Factory sized white, standard weight, with 1-1/2 inch minimum longitudinal pressure sealing lap and seal strips for butt joints.

G. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. Flame resistant glass fiber adhered to outside of a 1 mil aluminum foil sheet with longitudinal pressure sealing lap and seal strips for butt joints. a. End cement perm rating shall not exceed .05.

H. Piping Insulation by Types:

1. Domestic Hot Water Supply Piping Insulation:

a. Glass fiber molded insulation with pre-sized factory applied FRJ jacket of glass cloth with longitudinal lap and butt joint strips with self-sealing adhesive.

b. 1” thick for pipe sizes under 2 inches and 1-1/2 inch for 2 inches and over. c. Minimum density of 7-1/4 pounds per cubic foot, maximum thermal conductivity factor

of 0.26K at 75 degrees F mean temperature, and alkalinity of 0.696. d. Flame Spread: 25 or less. e. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. f. Accessories: Adhesive, mastics, cements, tapes for fittings, and related materials

shall have the same composite ratings as listed above.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Insulation:

1. Provide over clean dry surfaces with joints firmly butted together. 2. Longitudinal lap for pre-sized glass cloth or vapor barrier jackets shall overlap not less than 1-

1/2 inches. 3. Wrap butt joints with a 3 inch wide strip of the same material as the jacket. 4. Run continuous through wall, floor and ceiling penetrations. 5. Provide aluminum jackets over the insulation where sealant is required. 6. Do not apply insulation until the entire system has been tested and accepted. 7. Soil pipes, horizontal rainwater pipes, and rainwater pipes that run through noise sensitive

areas such as bedrooms should be wrapped with insulation.


B. Protection Shield: Where insulation passes thru hangers provide a protection shield, 180 arc, galvanized sheet metal covering, minimum 12 inches long, 16 gage galvanized metal.

C. Flanges, Fittings and Valves on Insulated Piping:

1. Provide pre-molded glass fiber fittings wired or taped on and adhered with canvas jacket. 2. Terminate insulation and jacket neatly and finish with insulating cement troweled to a bevel

and of the same thickness as adjoining insulation.

D. Vapor Barriers:

1. Intact and continuous. 2. Do not install with staples.

E. Omit Insulation From the Following:

1. Discharge lines from safety and relief valves. 2. Nickel and/or chrome plated piping, unless noted otherwise.


PIPING (PLUMBING) 15410 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 15410 - PIPING (PLUMBING)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Related Sections:

1. 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 2. 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures, Trim and Supports.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A53-96 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.

2. A74-96 Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 3. A106-95 Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature

Service. 4. B32-96 Specification for Solder Metal. 5. B88-96 Specification for Seamless Copper Water-Tube. 6. B306-96 Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). 7. C564-95a Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 8. D312-95a Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. 9. D2241-96 PVC Pressure Rated Pipe. 10. D2564-96a Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic

Piping Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit properly identified manufacturer's literature before starting work.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Pipe and Fittings: Manufacturer's name and mill reports. 2. Expansion Joints: Catalog cuts. 3. Dielectric Unions: Catalog cuts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials shall be new, unused, and best of their respective kinds, free from defects in labor quality, complying with latest publications in effect at time of bidding, and according to Construction Documents.

B. Cast Iron Drainage Pipe and Fittings:


1. Hub and Spigot: Service weight centrifugally spun cast iron, hub and spigot, tar coated inside and out, ASTM A74.

2. No-Hub: Service weight centrifugally spun cast iron, no-hub, tar coated inside and out, CISPI 310.

C. Galvanizing: By hot process on both inside and outside of pipe with zinc coating averaging at least 2 ounces per square foot and free from defects.

D. Threaded Cast Iron Drainage Pipe:

1. Uncoated service weight, ANSI A40.5.

E. Copper Tubing:

1. Type K or L: Seamless hard drawn or annealed, ASTM B88. 2. Type DWV: Seamless hard drawn, ASTM B306.

F. Steel Pipe: Seamless or welded steel, Schedule 40, black or galvanized threaded, ASTM A53 seamless Grade A.

G. Ductile Iron Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.

H. Polyvinylchloride Pipe (PVC):

1. Threaded. 2. Non-Threaded.

I. Cast Iron No-Hub Pipe Joint:

1. Cast Iron: ASTM A888. 2. Neoprene Gaskets: ASTM C564. 3. Aboveground: Stainless Steel Clamp and Shield Assembly: 300 Series, CISPI 301-69T. 4. Underground: ASTM C1277, cast iron couplings with neoprene compression gasket and

stainless steel bolts.

J. Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings: Recessed pattern ANSI B16.12.

K. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: Standard weight unless noted otherwise, ANSI B16.4.

L. Malleable Iron Fittings: Standard weight, threaded banded 150 pounds ANSI B16.3. Galvanized or black to match piping.

M. Cast Iron Fittings and Flanges:

1. Standard Weight: ANSI B16.1, unless otherwise noted. 2. Extra Heavy: ANSI B16.2.

N. Steel Flanges: 150 psi and 300 psi Class, ANSI B16.5, Grade 1.

O. Brass Fittings:


1. Copper Tubing Solder Drainage Fittings: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.22. 2. Copper Tubing Solder Fittings: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.22. 3. Threaded: Standard weight, banded, ANSI B16.15.

P. Press Fittings for Copper: Type K copper and bronze, ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. O-rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM.

1. Viega, Lakewood, OH. 2. Ridge Tool Co., Elyria, OH. 3. Accepted equivalent.

Q. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564.

R. Compression Gaskets, Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C564.

S. Solder Metal:

1. Similar to silver-tin-copper alloy ASTM B32. 2. All solder shall be certified no-lead.

T. Joint Compound: Tite-Seal or accepted equivalent.

U. Unions: As specified in Section 15430.

V. Protective Coating: Cabot's Flexi-Black or accepted equivalent.

W. Vent Flashing: Provide flashing for vents through the roof for installation as specified in Section 07600.

X. Vandalproof Ventstack Caps: Provide vandalproof ventstack caps,

1. Vandalproof hood (threaded) and counterflashing (threaded) cast iron with standard rust resistant prime coating for installation under this section. No.1530-3 hood and 1520-2 counterflashing by Stoneman.

2. Vent extension/flashing by Vent Extensions, Inc., Wellington, FL. 3. Vandalproof cap, 18 gage, type 304 stainless steel by S.B.C., North Miami, FL.

Y. Exterior Wall Pipe Penetration: Provide a multi-joint circular clamping device to the pipe. Link Seal by Thunder Line Corp., or accepted equivalent.

Z. Locator Tape for PVC: 2 inches wide, metallic. No.37220 for sewer lines and 37222 for water lines, by Seton or accepted equivalent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Run piping as indicated in Construction Documents subject to modifications as required to suit field conditions, to avoid interference with other trades, and for proper, convenient, and accessible locations to parts of the piping system.


B. Run piping in wall chases, recesses, pipe shafts, and hung ceilings where provided.

1. Do not run gas or water piping in floor fill. 2. Run piping as high as possible under building, above ceilings, and close to slabs. 3. Do not permanently close, furr in, or cover piping before examination and final tests.

C. Run piping straight and where concealed as direct as possible with risers erected plumb and true.

1. Install piping with minimum 1 inch clearance between finished pipe coverings and adjacent work.

2. Support piping from structure above, maintaining maximum headroom available.

D. Do not run piping in telephone rooms, electrical equipment rooms/closets, transformer vaults or rooms containing related equipment, or close to or above control panels, switchboards and electric motors except required branch piping to pumps. If pipes are installed in these rooms, they shall be relocated at no extra cost to the Board.

E. Provide control valves where noted or required for complete regulating control of systems, plumbing fixtures, and equipment. Provide valves in accessible locations or accessible through access panels.

F. Coat Underground metal piping, except cast iron, with 1/16" thick black bituminous protective coating.

G. Fittings, Valves, and Hangers on Chrome Plated Piping: Chrome plated finish to match.

H. Provide reducing fittings for changes in pipe sizes. Bushings will not be allowed.

I. Provide extra heavy pipe for nipples where unthreaded pipe is less than 1-1/2".

1. Do not use close nipples. Use saddle nipples. 2. Provide galvanized iron sleeves for pipes passing through roof slabs, interior floors,

ceilings, walls, or partitions.

J. Provide at least 20 feet of bitumen coated type "K" copper pipe for exterior underground domestic water at each service entering the building.

K. Expansion Swings:

1. Make adequate provisions for proper expansion and contraction of piping and for piping passing through building expansion joints.

2. Make branch connections from risers with ample swing or offset to avoid strain on fittings or short pipe lengths. Anchor horizontal runs of pipe over 50 feet in length to walls or supporting structure about midway of run to allow expansion evenly divided toward ends.

3. Provide sufficient number of elbow swings or accepted expansion joints to allow proper expansion and contraction of mains and risers.

L. Pipe Slopes:


1. Lay horizontal soil and waste pipes, unless otherwise noted on drawings, to:

a. 1/8" per foot minimum for pipe 3 inches and larger b. 1/4" per foot minimum for pipe less than 3 inches c. Horizontal vent lines shall have a minimum grade back to the stacks or vertical

lines and shall run as direct and free from bends as possible.

2. Lay storm drainage pipes to 1/8" per foot minimum, unless otherwise noted on drawings.

M. Exposed Piping:

1. Install horizontal runs maximum 4 inches below adjacent structure and run parallel or perpendicular to walls, ceilings, beams, and columns unless otherwise noted on Construction Documents.

N. Piping Materials by System:

1. Sanitary Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping:

a. Aboveground: PVC, service weight no-hub cast iron pipe and fittings, DWV copper pipe with cast brass or wrought copper solder joint drainage fittings.

b. Under Ground Floor Slabs:

1) Cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings. 2) Cast iron no-hub pipe and fittings with corrosion resistant couplings and

neoprene compression gaskets.

2. Vandalproof Vent Caps:

a. Install according to manufacturer�s printed instructions.

3. Domestic Water Supply Piping: Drilling tubes for field manufactured fittings is not allowed.

a. Aboveground Interior:

1) Copper Tubing Type L:

a) Wrought copper solder joint fitting without the use of lead components. Tubing used with this type shall not be soft drawn.

b) Bending of tubing having a radius of not less than 4 tube diameters without deformation may be used for tubing diameters not exceeding 1 inch. Copper tubing used for this type connection shall be bending temper.

c) Victaulic copper connection system with Style 606 couplings. Tubing used with this type connection shall be drawn temper.

b. Underground Exterior:

1) Copper Tubing Type K:


a) Soft tempered copper with cast bronze or soldered joint fittings coated with bitumen.

c. Optional Press Connections for Aboveground Interior Copper Tubing Type L and Underground Exterior Copper Tubing Type K:

1) Press fittings shall be made according to the manufacturer�s installation instructions.

2) The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting and the tubing marked at the shoulder of the fitting.

3) The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting.

4) The joints shall be pressed using the tool approved by the manufacturer.

O. Joints and Methods of Connections:

1. Cast Iron Bell and Spigot Pipe:

a. Compression Gaskets:

1) Gasket and pipe by same manufacturer. 2) Install according to manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Cast Iron No-Hub Pipe:

a. Aboveground: Joint with neoprene rubber sleeve and stainless steel ring clamp according to manufacturer’s instructions.

b. Underground: Joint with cast iron coupling, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel bolts according to manufacturer’s instructions.

P. Pipe Cleaning Systems:

1. Domestic Water Piping: Flush clean domestic water distribution systems for cold water before placing in service.

3.02 TESTS

A. Furnish necessary instruments, test equipment, and personnel required to perform tests and remove test equipment and drain pipes after tests have been made and accepted.

B. After portions of mechanical work are completed and ready for testing, given 48 hours notice to A/E and perform tests in A/E’s presence.

C. Tests may be made of isolated portions of piping to facilitate the general progress of installation.

1. Revisions subsequently made in piping system shall require retesting of such affected portions of piping systems.

2. Subject piping and connections to a hydrostatic or pneumatic pressure test before painting, installation of insulation or concealment.

3. Sanitary Drainage System:


a. Apply a water test to all parts of drainage systems before pipes are concealed or fixtures set in place.

b. Close openings of each system to be tested tightly except highest openings above roof and fill entire system with water up to overflow point of highest opening.

c. Subject systems to not less than 10 feet of hydrostatic head, except uppermost 10 feet of piping directly below opening.

1) Water shall remain in the systems for not less than 60 minutes after which time no leaks occur at any point and no lowering of water level at overflow point is visible.

4. Water Supply Piping:

a. Apply a pressure test to water system before piping is concealed or insulated and before fixtures and equipment are connected.

b. Apply a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 200 psig for 2 hours, with no leaks occurring in the system.

1) Water used for tests shall be obtained from a potable source of supply.

3.03 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Clean fixtures, equipment, piping, and exposed work.

1. Show traps, wastes, and supplies free and unobstructed. 2. Plated, polished bronze, or painted surfaces bright and clean.

B. After installation, adjust valves, faucets, and automatic control devices for quiet operation. Balance system as required for proper operation.

C. Disinfection: After cleaning and testing domestic water system, disinfect by introducing a solution of calcium hypochlorite with 50 parts per million of chlorine.

1. Open and close all valves while system in being chlorinated. After disinfecting agent has been applied for 24 hours, test for residual chorine at ends of pipe.

2. If less than 5 ppm is indicated, repeat process until it is equal to or greater than 5 ppm or according to AWWA C601 Standards.


DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS 15421 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 15421 - DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection. 2. 15410 - Piping (Plumbing).

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit properly identified manufacturer's literature before starting work.

B. Submit Shop Drawings/Catalog cuts on the following:

1. Drains. 2. Cleanouts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Model numbers are taken from Josam.

1. Accepted equivalents:

a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. b. Blucher-Josam. c. Wade. d. Zurn.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Drains:

1. Toilet Room (FD-1):

a. Coated cast iron floor drain, 2 piece body, double drainage flange, invertible non-puncturing flashing collar, weepholes, bottom outlet, inside caulk connection, trap primer connection and adjustable satin Nikaloy 6" X 6" super-flo strainer.

b. Josam No.30000-S-50-VP-X.

2. Janitor Room (FD-2):

a. Modular coated cast iron floor drain with double drainage flange, non-puncturing flashing collar, weepholes, bottom outlet, inside caulk connection, round top, removable shallow sediment bucket, trap primer connection, and medium duty


anti-tilting super-flo grate with perimeter drainage slots. b. No.32100-50-81-VP-X by Josam or accepted equivalent.

B. Cleanouts and Cleanout Access Covers:

1. Floor, Interior Finished Rooms:

a. Cast iron, adjustable inside caulk outlet, brass internal plug, Nikaloy scoriated cover plate secured by countersunk plug.

b. No.56020-88-15 by Josam or accepted equivalent.

2. Stack Base for Use in Block Walls:

a. Cast iron "T" branch tee with plated cast iron countersunk plug, lead seal, satin stainless steel round access cover plate secured with countersunk screw.

b. No.58790-15 by Josam or accepted equivalent.

3. Stack Base for Use in Plaster Walls:

a. Cast iron "T" branch tee coated cast iron countersunk plug, lead seal, cast brass round access cover with anchor lugs, satin stainless steel cover secured with countersunk screw.


4. Stack Base for Use in Tile Walls:

a. Cast iron "T" branch with brass countersunk plug, cast brass square access cover with satin top, anchor lugs, cover plate secured with 4 screws.


5. Cleanout Sizes:

a. Full pipe size up through 4 inches, pipe cleanouts with bodies of standard pipe size and caulking ferrules conforming to thickness required for pipe and fittings of same metal.

6. Removable Cleanout Plugs:

a. Cast bronze with screw threads and recessed bronze socket. No.58540 by Josam or accepted equivalent.

C. Wall Access:

1. Cast bronze, polished chrome plated square frame and cover, 12" X 12" minimum opening or larger, as required.

2. No.58640 by Josam or accepted equivalent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


A. Provide drains and cleanouts as scheduled on drawings.

B. Cleanouts:

1. Place pipe cleanouts at the foot of each soil and waste stack in sanitary system and place pipe cleanouts in horizontal runs not to exceed 50 foot spacing.

2. Install access covers as specified.

C. Interior Flush Cleanouts:

1. Flush cleanouts with recessed sockets (without access covers) may be used in non-finished areas such as equipment rooms, storage rooms, and the like, if top of hub is installed in level position and top of clean out plug is flush with the concrete floor.


PIPING SPECIALTIES (PLUMBING) 15430 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 15430 - PIPING SPECIALTIES (PLUMBING)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Related Section:

1. 15410 - Piping (Plumbing).

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A126-95 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit Shop Drawings/catalog cuts for the following:

1. Shock Absorbers. 2. Unions and Flanges. 3. Hangers and Inserts. 4. Trap Resealers. 5. Vacuum Breakers. 6. Gages and Thermometers. 7. Strainers. 8. Firestop Devices. 9. Water Hammer Arrestors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Trap Resealers:

1. Water Closet Valve: Chrome plated with tubing to wall and wall flange. Water closet shall be no more than 20 feet from floor drain. No.F-72-A1 by Sloan Valve Co. or accepted equivalent.

2. Lavatory or Sink: Cast brass chrome plated with 1/2" female union connection and 1/2" female outlets, integral vacuum breaker.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Josam, No.88250. 2) Chicago Faucet Co., No.447. 3) Zurn Industries, Inc., No.Z-1022.


3. Remote Location:

a. Machined brass valve with integral vacuum breaker, pressure adjustment and distribution units with visual operations inspection cover where required for multiple connections.

b. By Precision Plumbing Products Model P.1 or P.2 as applicable, or accepted equivalent.

B. Shock Absorbers:

1. Stainless steel shell, elastomeric bellows, pressurized argon charge, sized per PDI-WH 201 at each branch of cold and hot water supplies, group toilets, and as shown on Construction Documents.

a. Zurn Industries, Inc., No.Z-1700. b. Josam, No.75000.

2. Copper shell at individual toilet rooms and isolated fixtures. By Josam 75000-S or accepted equivalent.

C. Water Hammer Arrestors:

1. Sioux Chief Mfg. or accepted equivalent.

D. Vacuum Breakers:

1. Hose Bibb Vacuum Breaker: Non-removable. No 8A by Watts Regulator Co. or accepted equivalent.

2. Atmospheric Type: No.288A by Watts Regulator Co. or accepted equivalent. 3. For Plumbing Fixtures: As specified under Section 15440.

E. Unions and Flanges:

1. Steel Pipe 2" and Smaller: Malleable iron unions with brass seat. Galvanized pipe requires galvanized unions.

2. Steel Pipe 2-1/2" and Larger: Bronze flanged connections 150 pound Class. Galvanized pipe requires galvanized unions.

3. Copper Pipe 2" and Smaller: Bronze unions. 4. Copper Pipe 2-1/2" and Larger: Bronze flanged connections 150 pound Class. 5. Dielectric Unions or Flanges:

a. Meet dimensional requirements and tensile strength of pipe unions or flanges according to Fed. Spec. WW-U-531D.

b. Suitable for required operating pressures and temperature conditions. c. Provide metal connections on both ends. Ends shall be threaded or soldered to

match adjacent piping. d. Separate metal parts at union to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals.

F. Escutcheons:


1. Provide escutcheons securely in place on exposed pipes passing through walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings of finished areas unless otherwise noted on Construction Documents.

2. Provide escutcheons with sufficient outside diameter to adequately cover sleeved openings.

3. Interior Walls, Partitions, and Ceilings: Solid or stamped chrome plated brass or stainless steel, one piece or split pattern.

4. Floors and Exterior: Solid cast brass, rough chrome plated or cast nickel bronze alloy, one piece or split pattern.

G. Pressure Gages:

1. Cast aluminum alloy case, face diameter minimum 3-1/2", range selected so operating pressure is at middle of range.

2. Accuracy: ANSI Grade A maximum of 1.5 percent error at any reading on scale. 3. Manufacturers:

a. Ashcroft. b. Marshalltown. c. Taylor Instrument Company.

H. Flexible Connectors:

1. Rubber flexible pipe, 125 psi minimum working pressure rating, 6 inch maximum length. 2. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Style 100 by Metraflex or accepted equivalent.

I. Strainers:

1. �Y� pattern, monel screen, all bronze, 400 psi WOG, cleanout valve, 1/2" to 3". YSBR 100 Series by Wilkins or accepted equivalent.

2. �Y� pattern, ASTM 126, Class B Cast Iron, flanged connections, stainless steel screen, 200 psi WOG, 2 inches to 10 inches. 77F series by Watts Regulator or accepted equivalent.

J. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Provide hangers, supports, and supplementary steel as specified for different applications.

2. Insert, Hangers, Rods, and Clamps: Figure numbers used refer to Grinnell. Fee and Mason or Elcen Metal Products are also accepted manufacturers.

a. Inserts:

1) Universal Concrete Insert: Fig.282. 2) CB Junior Concrete Insert: Fig.279. 3) Wedge Type Concrete Insert: Fig.281. 4) Expansion Case: Fig.117.

b. Hangers: Adjustable clevis type.


1) Cast Iron Pipe: Fig.590. 2) Copper Tubing: Fig.CT-65. 3) Insulated Steel Pipe: Fig.300. 4) Uninsulated Steel Pipe: Fig.146.

c. Clamps:

1) V.F.S. beam clamp with weldless eyenut, Fig.292, clamp size 1, rod size 3/4".

2) C-clamp with retaining clip, Fig.87. 3) I-beam clamp, Fig.131. 4) Universal side I beam clamp, Fig.225. 5) C-clamp, copper finish, Fig.CT88.

d. Rods: Galvanized with continuous thread, Fig.146. e. Riser Clamps:

1) Black Steel, Fig.261. 2) Plastic coated, Fig.261C 3) Copper finish, Fig.CT121.

3. Horizontal Steel and PVC Piping: Clamp or Hanger

Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing

Up to 1-1/4" 3/8" 8 feet 1-1/2 and 2 inches 3/8" 10 feet 2-1/2 and 3 inches 1/2" 12 feet 4 and 5 inches 5/8" 12 feet 6 inches 3/4" 15 feet 8 inches & larger 1 inch 15 feet

4. Horizontal Copper Piping: Clamp or Hanger

Pipe Rod Diameter Maximum SpacingUp to 1 inch 3/8" 6 feet 1-1/4 and 1-1/2" 3/8" 6 feet 2 inches 3/8" 8 feet 2-1/2" 1/2" 8 feet 3 and 4 inches 1/2" 8 feet

5. Horizontal Cast Iron Piping:

Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum SpacingUp to 4 inches 1/2" 5 feet 4 inches 5/8" 5 feet 6 inches and larger 3/4" 5 feet

6. Wall Support:


a. U-clamps as accepted. b. Unistrut supports.

7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamps.

K. Insulation Protection Shield: Fig.167.

L. Access Panels (Wall or Ceiling): As specified in Section - 08305.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Inserts:

1. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs or beams when possible.

2. Provide flush inserts at concrete to be a finished surface.

B. Flashing:

1. Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipment passes through exterior or waterproofed floors, walls, or roofs.

C. Sleeves:

1. Seal space between pipe or duct and surrounding floor, wall, or ceiling construction with noncombustible insulation and tight fitting metal caps on both sides with caulking.

a. Pipe Through Floors: Form from 18 gage galvanized sheet metal. b. Pipes Through Beams, Walls, Fireproofing, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors:

Form from steel plate or 18 gage galvanized sheet metal.

2. Size sleeves to allow movement caused by expansion. 3. Seal and fireproof penetrations.

D. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Provide adjustable hangers, inserts, brackets, rolls, clamps, and supplementary steel as required for proper support of pipelines.

a. Design hangers to allow for expansion and contraction of pipelines. Size to allow pipe covering to run continuously through hangers. Allow for proper anchoring and movement of all hot lines.

b. Install hangers to allow 1/2" minimum clear space between finished covering and adjacent work.

c. Place a hanger within 1 foot of each horizontal elbow. d. Use hangers with 1-1/2" minimum vertical adjustment after piping is erected. e. Provide multiple or trapeze hangers if several pipes can be installed in parallel

and at the same elevation.


f. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping when practical. g. Piping shall not be supported by equipment. h. Coordinate location of hangers with light fixtures. i. Wire brush steel or iron supports and prepare surfaces ready for painting

specified under Section 09900. Prime coat exposed non galvanized hangers and supports.

j. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping or provide sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping. Dissimilar metal contact is not allowed.

2. Horizontal Cast Iron and PVC Pipe: Place hangers within 18 inches of hub or joint. 3. Hubless Joints: Provide support at every other joint. Support each joint when length

between supports exceeds 4 feet. 4. Plastic Pipe: Provide roll hangers and install loose to allow for contraction and expansion. 5. Trapeze Clamp or Hangers:

a. Secure pipes supported by trapeze clamp or hangers and not mounted on pipe rolls to trapeze with pipe clamps or �U� bolts.

b. Place clamp or hangers at each change of direction. c. Place clamp or hangers within 1 foot of valves and other appurtenances in

horizontal piping. d. Place clamp or hangers maximum 3 feet from end of each branch runout.

6. Insulated Pipes:

a. Provide hangers with a diameter large enough to include insulation. b. Install a protection shield with each hanger. 180 degree arc, 16 gage galvanized

sheet metal covering, minimum 12 inches long. c. Provide support saddles for insulated piping over 2 inches in diameter.

7. Special Supports: Clamps, hangers, and supports required by equipment manufacturers shall be installed according to equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

8. Plumbers tape, straps, chain, wire hangers, or perforated bar are not allowed for hanging pipe.

E. Backflow Preventors:

1. Install aboveground in 6'-0" high fenced enclosures.

F. Water Hammer Arresters:

1. Supply Piping: Provide a water hammer arrester for each fixture supply including hot and cold water. Do not provide air chambers where water hammer arresters are installed.

G. Unions and Flanges: Provide at connections of equipment and at strainers and control valves.

H. Escutcheons: Fit and firmly secure escutcheons to pipes passing through finished floors, ceilings and walls.


PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM, AND SUPPORTS 15440 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park REVISED 03-15-11Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM, AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. 10800 - Toilet Room Accessories 2. 15410 - Piping (Plumbing). 3. 15430 - Piping Specialties (Plumbing).

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings for the following:

1. Fixtures: Catalog cuts with rough-in dimensions identified as designated in fixture schedule, riser diagrams, and as specified.

2. Faucets: Catalog cuts and templates for drilled openings. 3. Fixture Trim: Catalog cuts. 4. Carriers: Catalog cuts.


A. Certification: Submit a letter, signed jointly by the manufacturer of the product and the installer of the product, attesting that no lead is contained in any piece of equipment or in the piping connections that could contaminate water, drinks, or food by contact.

B. Comply with Florida Building Code (FBC).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fixtures:

1. American Standard. 2. Bradley. 3. Fiat. 4. Elkay. 5. Kohler. 6. Toto.

B. Fittings:

1. American Standard. 2. Chicago Faucets. 3. Fiat. 4. Elkay. 5. Powers Process Controls.


6. Symmons Industries. 7. Sloan. 8. T & S Brass. 9. Toto. 10. Zurn.

C. Equipment:

1. Haws. 2. Halsey Taylor. 3. Oasis.

2.02 FIXTURES

A. Water Closets (WC-1):

1. White vitreous china, top spud, siphon jet flush action, 1.6 gpf, elongated bowl, ADA accessible.

a. Madera 17” EL.1.6-3043.102 by American Standard or accepted equivalent.

2. Flush Valve: Sensor activated Sloan Royal Optima 111-1.6ES-S-TP TMO or accepted equivalent by Sloan Regal, Toto, or Zurn.

3. Seat: Elongated, open front less cover.

a. 95 by Olsonite. b. Lustra K-4670-C by Kohler.

B. Urinal (UR-1):

1. Washout Flush Action: Wall hung, 1.0 gpf, vitreous china, 3/4” top inlet spud.

a. Washbrook 1.0 6501.010 by American Standard or accepted equivalent.

2. Flush Valve: Sensor activated, Sloan Royal Optima 180-1.0 ES-S or accepted equivalent.

C. Urinal (UR-1A):

1. Same as UR-1 but ADA accessible. Refer to architectural drawings for mounting height.

D. Service Sink (SSK - 1):

1. Molded resin, 24 inches x 24 inches x 10 inches, rim guards, center drain.

a. Model MSR-2424 by Florestone. b. Model MSB-2424 by Fiat.

2. Fitting: Exposed yoke, wall mounted, vacuum breaker, top brace, stops in shanks.

a. Heritage 8344.112 by American Standard. b. Knoxford K-8904-RP by Kohler.


c. Model 830-AA by Fiat.

3. Accessories: Provide mop hangerbracket, hose and bracket combination.

E. Lavatories:

1. Wall Hung LAV/HC Lav (Lav-1 / Lav-1A):

a. Enameled cast iron, 20 inches x 18 inches, single hole fitting, with lug holes for concealed carrier arms.

1) Comrade 0124.131 by American Standard or accepted equivalent.

b. Cold Water Fitting, accessible: Single lavatory fitting, self closing metering, adjustable time cycle, push handle, vandal resistant aerator, escutcheon plates.

1) 1340.225 by American Standard. 2) 333-669 by Chicago Faucets.

c. Supply Pipe: 3/8” rigid riser with loose key control. By McGuire or accepted equivalent.

d. “P” Trap: Adjustable offset with tubing drain to wall, cleanout plug and wall escutcheon. By McGuire or accepted equivalent.

e. Grid Drain: Perforated, chrome plated, 1-1/4” offset tailpiece. By McGuire or accepted equivalent.

f. Floor Mounted Carrier Arms: Josam 17100-M-628 or accepted equivalent. g. Refer to architectural drawings for mounting height.

F. Electric Water Coolers (EWC - 1):

1. Wall Mounted, 2-stream mound building projector, self-closing valve with automatic stream regulator, polished chrome plated brass bubbler, push bars in front and on both sides, for handicapped and standard use. See Drawings for mounting elevations.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Halsey Taylor: Model HAC8FS-Q-ADA PV. b. Haws: Model HWUACO8 c. Oasis: Model P8AC.

3. No lead shall be allowed in the manufacture of any piece of equipment within water coolers nor in any piping joint or connection within the unit.

G. Floor Drain Reseal: F 72A1 by Sloan or accepted equivalent.

2.03 CARRIERS

A. All carriers shall be fully bolted to floor and installed as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Lavatory/Lavatory HC:

a. Rectangular structural steel uprights with integral welded heavy steel foot, cast iron concealed arms. Model 17100 by Josam or accepted equivalent.


2. Water Closet:

a. Josam 12000 Series Chase-Saver II, 4 inch pipe size, with pylon feet, adjustable, provided with vandal proof trim, supply pipe support and adjustable chase extensions or accepted equivalent.

3. Urinals:

a. Rectangular structural steel uprights with integral welded heavy steel foot, cast iron concealed arms. Model 17100 by Josam or accepted equivalent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected.

3.02 EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide necessary material and labor to connect fixtures and equipment having plumbing connections including fixtures and equipment specified and furnished in other sections.

B. Supply Pipe Cut-off Valves:

1. Equip supply pipes to each item of equipment or fixture (except faucets furnished with an integral stop) with a cutoff valve to enable isolation of the item of equipment or fixture for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other items of equipment or fixtures.

C. Supply Pipe Support: Anchor supply piping to all items of equipment or fixtures to prevent movement.

D. Templates: Furnish templates and rough opening dimensions to fabricators of countertops and case work for location and sizes of openings for faucets and sink.


WATER HEATERS 15457 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 15457 - WATER HEATERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: A complete hot water generating system with necessary accessories as indicated on Construction Documents, as specified, and as required by code.


1. 15260 - Thermal Insulation (Plumbing). 2. 15410 - Piping (Plumbing). 3. 15430 - Piping Specialties (Plumbing).

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Water Heaters and Boilers: Catalog cuts, performance characteristics.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Instant Type Water Heaters (Tankless) (IWH-1):

1. Electric water heaters shall be tankless type with a flow activation switch operating only when hot water side of faucet is turned on.

2. The heat exchanger shall be constructed of a noncorrosive metal alloy. The units shall have high temperature thermal cutoffs for a maximum temperature of 190 degrees F. to shut down the heating elements and avoid a steam situation.

3. The minimum flow activation shall be 0.5 GPM and minimum pressure requirements shall be 5 psi.

4. Maximum operating pressure of 150 psi. Units shall be tested to UL 499. 5. Controls shall not allow water temperature to exceed 110 degrees F. 6. Provide 15 year warranty. 7. Manufacturers:

a. Cronomite Laboratories, Inc., Model M-20L. b. Eemax Inc., Botsford, CT. c. Hot Aqua Inc., Culver City CA.

WATER HEATERS 15457 - 2 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Provide a gate valve and union at cold water connection to heater. A union shall be provided at hot water connection.

B. Provide on cold water supply to heater a vacuum relief valve of sufficient size to protect tank from back pressures.

C. Pressure relief valve and drain pan drain shall discharge to outside per code regulation or according to local ordinances.

D. Provide thermometer on top of heater in oversized tee and nipple on outlet piping of heater.

E. The water heater shall fit properly in the floor space provided. Installation shall be according to local, municipal, state, and national codes and manufacturer installation manual.


AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT 15820 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 15820 - AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED IN OTHER SECTIONS:

A. Ductwork: Section 15840.

1.3 Applicable Publications: The following publications of the issues listed below but referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto:

A. Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Fan Construction and Testing Standards.

B. Underwriter’s Laboratory: U.L. listed.

1.4 Quality Assurance: Fans shall be constructed and rated in accordance with AMCA standards.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Fans: Shop drawings; catalog cuts; certified performance curves; prefabricated roof curbs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General: Unless otherwise noted all fans shall be as follows: Centrifugal type. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. Fan brake horsepower ratings shall not exceed those scheduled. Surfaces provided with accepted corrosion resistant coatings. Provide drives to deliver design capacity at actual static pressures developed.

2.2 CEILING MOUNTED FANS

A. Fans shall have a centrifugal wheel enclosed in an acoustically insulated housing. Units shall have integral back draft damper and an inlet grille. Motor shall be resiliently supported and shall be completely removable through the face of the unit. Discharge position shall be changeable through use of interchangeable casing panels.

2.3 MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable manufacturers are PENN, GREENHECK, COOK or equivalent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Provide roof or masonry openings required for proper fan installation.

AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT 15820 - 2 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

3.2 See drawing schedule and vibration isolation section for proper isolator requirements.

3.3 Install fans as per manufacturer's recommendations or as shown on drawings.


DUCTWORK 15840 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 15840 - DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 Related work described in other sections:

A. Duct Accessories: Section 15860.

1.3 Applicable Publications: The following publications of the issues listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto:

A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

B. National Fire Protection Association (N.F.P.A.): STD-90A: Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

C. National Fire Protection Association (N.F.P.A.): STD-96: Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.

D. National Electric Code (N.E.C.): STD. No. 70.

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): STD-723: Test for surface burning characteristics of Building Materials.

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): STD-181A-M/B-M: Duct Sealant Tests.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For acoustically lined or internally insulated ducts, maintain sizes inside lining or insulation.

B. PRESSURE CLASSIFICATION: All supply, return, exhaust, outside air and ventilation ductwork shall be 2" W.G. class as per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, unless equipment schedules call for a pressure higher than 2" W.G. Pressure classification shall be applied to the highest pressure (2" W.G. or drawing schedules).

C. Leakage and Pressure Classification: Refer to SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual for additional information.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Ductwork:

1. 1/4 inch scale shop drawings: Shop drawings shall be fully coordinated with other trades before


submittal. Extreme care and coordination amongst all trades is required for a successful and approved installation.

2. Catalog Cuts: Ductwork, duct sealer, turning vanes. 3. Catalog Cuts, Ratings, and Performance Data: Flexible ductwork, duct lining.

B. Casings, Plenums and Housings; Details of construction.

C. Ductwork Fittings: Details of proposed typical ductwork fittings including:

1. Seams and joints and sealants. 2. Joint connection systems. 3. Elbows, vaned and radius. 4. Transitions and Offsets. 5. Branch connections and tees. 6. Taps and outlet frames.

D. Duct Hanger System: Catalog cuts and shop drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Flexible: Genflex or Flexible Technologies.

B. Ductwork and Fittings:

1. Metalaire. 2. Semco. 3. Spiramatic. 4. United Sheet Metal.

C. Medium Pressure Ductwork Adhesive Sealing Compound:

1. Benjamin Foster #30-02. 2. 3M Hardcast.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Ductwork shall be fabricated and installed according to the SMACNA Standards, except as shown on drawings or specified.

B. Ductwork shall have manufacturer's gage stamp intact.

2.3 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

A. Includes ductwork from low pressure air handlers, exhaust, and outside and return air ductwork. Velocities shall not exceed 1,300 fpm and static pressures not to exceed 2 inches WG.

B. Provide galvanized steel ductwork, designed, constructed, installed and tested according SMACNA - "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" and as shown on drawings. Ductwork to have manufacturer's


gage stamp. Provide cross-breaking or beading to prevent flexing, but do not reduce gage of metal below that required for flat ductwork sheets.

C. Provide galvanized steel saddles at points of support of insulated piping saddles according to Section 15051.

D. The following ductwork and plenums shall be insulated, unless noted otherwise.

1. Return air ductwork in non-conditioned spaces, including mechanical rooms and space above ceilings.

2. Return air transfer boots. 3. Return/outside air plenums at air handlers.

E. Plenums:

1. Galvanized steel with the largest dimension of 30 inches and larger shall be 18 gage. 2. Plenums shall be constructed, designed, installed, and tested according to SMACNA as

specified. Joints shall be angle reinforced pocket type. Provide fully gasketed joints between plenums and filter sections.

3. Provide plenum access doors where indicated on drawings. Doors shall be constructed according to Figure 6-12 of SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

F. Flexible Insulated Ductwork:

1. Lightweight duct, core of corrosion resistant reinforcing wire helix permanently bonded within fabric, insulated with 1-1/2" thick, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass flexible insulation and covered with a vapor barrier of aluminum metalized polyester film laminated to glass mesh, elastomer back coated. Duct shall meet NFPA 90A requirements and be listed as Class 1 Air Duct Material, UL 181.

2. Manufacturers: a. Atco Rubber Products. b. Genflex. c. Thermaflex II. d. Venture Type VTKC. e. Wiremold Co.

G. Ductwork and splitter dampers within the ductwork shall be made of the same material.

H. Turning vanes shall be provided in square elbows and shall be of same material as the ductwork. Turning vanes shall be of airfoil type, double thickness factory fabricated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install low and medium velocity ductwork as shown on drawings. 90 degree bends shall not be made in medium pressure flexible ducts.

B. Before systems are tested and balanced, ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned and blown out.


C. Where interferences arise during construction, make transition or division of ductwork on basis of pressure drop equivalent to original size. Obtain approval from A/E before fabrication.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install ductwork materials and accessories according to the latest edition of SMACNA Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards as specified. These written specifications shall take precedence in case of conflict.

3.3 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

A. Seams and joints in ductwork shall be made airtight. Seal duct joints with sealer as specified for field sealing of high pressure ductwork. Make exhaust ducts passing through return air chases airtight.

B. Install flexible ductwork shall be installed in sizes to match diffuser necks as indicated on drawings schedules. Duct length shall be not less than 5 feet and no longer than 7 feet. Duct shall be adequately supported to prevent kinks and sharp bends. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on drawings.

3.4 DUCTWORK SUPPORTS AND HANGERS

A. Provide support and hangers according to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

B. Hangers shall be galvanized steel hung from inserts or clip angles secured to structure with expansion bolts in shear or tension as follows:

1. Roof Slab: In tension. 2. Structural Beams: In shear, 12 inches minimum from bottom of beam. 3. Joists: Use existing forming bolts openings only. Hangers shall be bent under ductwork at least 2

inches. Hangers for ducts over 48 inches wide shall be secured to bottom and sides of duct.

3.5 DUCT PENETRATIONS TO FLOOR AND FIRE WALLS

A. Joints around duct penetrations shall be packed with fire safing insulation and sealed with fire and smoke barrier caulk as specified in Section 07270, Firestopping and Fire and Smoke Barrier Caulking.


DUCT ACCESSORIES 15860 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 15860 - DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 Related work described in other sections:

A. Ductwork: Section 15840.

1.3 Applicable Publications: The following publications of the issues listed below but referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicted by the references thereto:

A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): STD. 90-A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; STD. 90-B Standard for the Installation of Warm Heating and Air Conditioning Systems; STD. 96 Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Volume Dampers: Shop drawings.

B. Flexible Connections: Catalog cuts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Volume dampers shall be manual.

B. Volume dampers shall have opposed blades. Volume dampers shall be reinforced to prevent vibration and noise. All dampers shall have an indicating device with lock to hold damper in position for proper setting.

2.2 Flexible Connectors:

A. Flexible connectors shall be installed where fans connect to ducts or to apparatus casings to isolate vibration transfer. Connectors shall be airtight and watertight. Connectors shall be UL 214 listed. Connectors shall be sized at a minimum of 4 inches clear between connection items.

B. Connectors for indoor installations shall be fire retardant, either 22 oz./180 deg.F rated vinyl coated

DUCT ACCESSORIES 15860 - 2 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

woven nylon or 30 oz./200 deg.F rated neoprene coated woven fiberglass.

C. Acceptable manufacturers are Ductmate Industries Proflex; Ventafabrics, Inc., "Ventglass;" Elgen, "Neoprene Fabriduct;" or approved equal.

2.03 Round fittings in flexible ducts shall be factory fabricated galvanized steel fittings with dampers with locking regulator. All exposed edges of take-off openings in duct shall be completely enclosed by the clamping action of the fitting to prevent air leaks. Fitting types shall be as indicated on plans and as manufactured by Genflex or equivalent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Flexible connections shall be provided between air moving equipment and duct systems and at all duct penetrating at building expansion joints.


CODES AND STANDARDS 16023 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 16023 - CODES AND STANDARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. Comply with the following:

1. State Requirements for Educational Facilities - 1999 (SREF). 2. Florida Building Code (FBC). 3. Florida Building Code (FBC) - Gas. 4. Florida Building Code (FBC) - Mechanical. 5. Florida Building Code (FBC) - Plumbing. 6. National Electrical Code - 2002 (NEC), (NFPA 70). 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1997. NFPA 101 and other NFPA codes as

applicable, except NFPA 101 10-2.2.7 and 10.2.2.7 Exit Passageways and where exceeded by SREF.

8. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A117.1, 1995. 9. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-98.


A. Where materials and equipment are available under the continuing inspection and listing service of Underwriters Laboratories (UL), furnish materials and equipment so listed.

B. Comply with latest FPL Commercial/Industrial Energy Conservation Program Standards, if FPL is the available utility company.

C. A maximum of 3 helpers to 1 journeyman are allowed according to Metropolitan Dade County.

PART 2 NOT USED

PART 3 NOT USED


GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Ground rods. 2. Chemical rods.

C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

D. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.


B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1. Comply with UL 467.

C. Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground construction, comply with IEEE C2.

D. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:

a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. b. Boggs, Inc. c. Chance/Hubbell. d. Copperweld Corp. e. Dossert Corp. f. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. g. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. h. Galvan Industries, Inc. i. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. j. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. k. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co. l. Ideal Industries, Inc. m. ILSCO. n. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. o. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. p. Lightning Master Corp. q. Lyncole XIT Grounding. r. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. s. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. t. Robbins Lightning, Inc. u. Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co. v. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. w. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.


2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

B. Material: Aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, and copper.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.

D. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

E. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.

F. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

H. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:

1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. 3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated

with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

I. Aluminum Bonding Conductors: As follows:

1. Bonding Cable: 10 strands of No. 14 AWG aluminum conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded aluminum conductor. 3. Bonding Jumper: Aluminum tape, braided bare aluminum conductors, terminated with

aluminum ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

J. Ground Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles: As follows:

1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper conductor. 2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-treated

fir, or cypress or cedar.

K. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators.

2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS


A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.

B. Ground Rods: Sectional type; copper-clad steel.

1. Size: 3/4 by 120 inches in diameter.

C. Chemical Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, filled with nonhazardous chemical salts, terminated with a 4/0 bare conductor. Provide backfill material recommended by manufacturer.

D. Test Wells: Provide handholes as specified in Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.

B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.

C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells.

D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.

E. Ground Rod Clamps at Test Wells: Use bolted pressure clamps with at least two bolts.

F. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.


2. At doors, route the bus up to the top of the doorframe, across the top of the doorway, and down to the specified height above the floor.

G. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at least 24 inches below grade or bury 12 inches above duct bank when installed as part of the duct bank.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.

B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits.

C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the following items, in addition to those required by NEC:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

D. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from the grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.

E. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.

F. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

G. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Provide a grounding electrode in addition to installing a separate equipment grounding conductor with supply branch-circuit conductors.

3.3 INSTALLATION


A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes.

1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating.

B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.

D. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

E. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.

F. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve.

G. Install one test well for each service at the ground rod electrically closest to the service entrance. Set top of well flush with finished grade or floor.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.


D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make bolted- and clamped-type connections between conductors and ground rods.

F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.

G. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

H. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.

3.5 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING

A. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and counterpoise circling pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Use tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for counterpoise and for taps to equipment ground pad. Bury counterpoise not less than 18 inches below grade and 6 inches from the foundation.


A. Testing: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:

B. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

3. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record


of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

a. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. b. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. c. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. d. Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms. e. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

3.7 GRADING AND PLANTING

A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section. Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Division 2 Section "Landscaping." Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.


ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices required to comply with ANSI C2, NFPA 70, OSHA standards, and authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Schedule of Nomenclature: An index of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.

C. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate color, lettering style, and graphic features of identification products.


A. Comply with ANSI C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and NFPA 70 for color-coding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS

A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.

B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.


2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

C. Baked-Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

D. Exterior, Metal-Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

E. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32, stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Identification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with those required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

C. Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.

E. Install painted identification according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting. 2. Prime surfaces using type of primer specified for surface. 3. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of enamel.

F. Caution Labels for Indoor Boxes and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Install pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive labels identifying system voltage with black letters on orange background. Install on exterior of door or cover.

G. Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: Install labels externally.

1. Exposed Boxes: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive plastic label on cover. 2. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card-stock tags. 3. Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of panel and circuit number or

equivalent.

H. Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line


marker located directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches overall, use a single line marker. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

I. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows:

1. Warnings, Cautions, and Instructions: Install to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.

2. Emergency Operation: Install engraved laminated signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.

J. Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate. Install on each unit of equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes power, lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory identification. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high lettering on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. Use white lettering on black field. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of equipment using mechanical fasteners:

1. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. 2. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. 3. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. 4. Electrical substations. 5. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. 6. Motor-control centers. 7. Disconnect switches. 8. Enclosed circuit breakers. 9. Motor starters. 10. Push-button stations. 11. Power transfer equipment. 12. Contactors. 13. Remote-controlled switches. 14. Dimmers. 15. Control devices. 16. Transformers. 17. Inverters. 18. Rectifiers. 19. Frequency converters. 20. Battery racks. 21. Power-generating units. 22. Telephone switching equipment. 23. Clock/program master equipment. 24. Call system master station. 25. TV/audio-monitoring master station. 26. Fire alarm master station or control panel. 27. Security-monitoring master station or control panel.



BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16100 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 16100 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Coordination With Other Trades:

1. Examine drawings and specifications. Visit site to determine work to be performed by Electrical, Mechanical, HVAC, and other trades.

2. Provide required electrical materials and equipment to put work into operation, completely wired, tested, and ready for use including raceways, conductors, disconnects, starters/contactors, or other devices for proper operation and sequences of electrical, mechanical, or other systems or equipment.

3. Unless otherwise noted, conduit, wire for controls, and devices, both line and low voltage, shall be provided and installed as described in this or other parts of the Construction Documents.

a. Install boxes or housings necessary for conduit and wire to controls, excluding items to be installed in piping, ducts, tanks, machinery, solenoid valves, pressure switches, aquastats, or similar devices.

b. These items are specified for installation in other sections. Connecting wiring is specified in this Division.

4. Control wiring in separate conduit between HVAC sensing devices and control panels or motors, shall be installed under this Division after verification from approved shop drawings of the required locations and connections.

5. Seal penetrations through fire rated floors or walls with fire resistant compound as specified in Section 07270.

6. Connect electrical equipment and devices as parts of the equipment or furniture furnished under other sections.

7. Comply with provisions of Instructions to Bidders and General Conditions and Section 01340.

B. Tradesperson Qualifications:

1. Contractor shall provide or cause to be provided by the appropriate subcontractors in the electrical trade for all work required by this Division 16, a ratio of one licensed master or journeyman for every three trainees at all times as those terms are defined by Chapter 10 of the Miami-Dade County Code. No other workers shall be allowed.

2. Where the work of these trades is subcontracted:

a. The contractor shall include this requirement in those subcontracts. b. The subcontractor shall show capacity to bond the subcontracted work. The

decision to require such bond to be issued remains with the general contractor.

C. To ensure compliance with the above tradesperson qualifications requirement, the General Contractor shall require the trade subcontractor to submit with each draw request, and shall in turn submit with the General Contractors draw request, a certified payroll identifying each tradesperson employed for the work of this section during the payroll period, the qualification


level of each tradesperson, and where licensed as a Master or Journeyman the license number of each individual.

1. This certified payroll shall also reflect the number of hours spent on this project performing the work of this section and shall reflect the appropriate ratio of qualified tradespersons as required by this section.

2. Failure to comply with this section either in providing the appropriate number of required licensed personnel or failure to submit the appropriate certified payroll information as required herein shall be a major breach of the contract and shall result in rejection of the payment application where the breach occurs and be cause for termination of the contract.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers Data:

1. Complete list of materials to be furnished under this section. 2. Manufacturers' specifications and other data required to assure specification compliance. 3. Catalog cuts, clearly marked for identification of items to be provided, including

disconnects, breakers, fuses, starters, lighting fixtures, transformers, or other materials not requiring specially prepared Shop Drawings.

B. Shop Drawings for nonstandard items, including but not limited to panelboards, switchboards, control centers, disconnects, anchoring layouts and details, and similar products.

C. Contract Closeout Submittals:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Warranties. 3. Operating Instructions, maintenance manuals, and parts lists. 4. Point-to-point wiring diagrams.


A. Delivery and Storage:

1. Deliver materials to jobsite in their original unopened containers with labels and certifications intact and clearly legible at time of use.

2. Store materials according to manufacturers' recommendations and as approved by A/E.

B. Replacement: In case of damage, pilferage, or other loss, make immediate repair or replacement of materials necessary to obtain approvals of A/E, without cost to the Board.

C. Protection: Use necessary means to protect materials of this section before, during, and after installation, including protection of installed work and materials of other trades.

PART 2 NOT USED


PART 3 NOT USED


CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.


1. Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media" for transmission media used for control and signal circuits.

2. Division 16 Section "Undercarpet Cables" for flat cables for undercarpet installations. 3. Division 16 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor

cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2001 to 35,000 V.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.


C. Comply with NFPA 70.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 5. Southwire Company.

B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings.

C. Conductor Material: Copper with stranded conductor.

D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN.

2.3 CONDUCTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 3. Hubbell/Anderson. 4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 5. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

H. Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type UF multiconductor cable.

I. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord.

J. Fire Alarm Circuits: Power-limited, fire-protective, signaling circuit cable.

K. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

L. Class 2 Control Circuits: Power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, which will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section 16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."


F. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section 16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.


A. Testing: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:

B. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.


RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.


1. Division 16 Section 16140 "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box service fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

F. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

G. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.


3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 4. Electri-Flex Co. 5. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. 6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. 7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 8. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Co.


B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

D. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

E. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.

F. Plastic-Coated IMC and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.

G. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.

1. Fittings: Set-screw or compression type.

H. FMC: Aluminum.

I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

J. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.

2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers:

1. American International. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Arnco Corp. 4. Cantex Inc. 5. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 6. Condux International. 7. ElecSYS, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 11. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 12. Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 13. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. ENT: NEMA TC 13.

C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC.

D. ENT and RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

E. LFNC: UL 1660.

2.4 METAL WIREWAYS


A. Manufacturers:

1. Hoffman. 2. Square D.

B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.

E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.5 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hoffman. 2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with no holes or knockouts. Cover is gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections are flanged, with stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

C. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.

D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

E. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.

2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company.3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 4. Hoffman.


5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

H. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.7 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors:

1. Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC. 2. Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC.


3. Underground, Single Run: RNC. 4. Underground, Grouped: RNC. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors:

1. Exposed: EMT. 2. Concealed: EMT. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows:

a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

C. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.

E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.


G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches of concrete cover.

1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement.

2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. 3. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement.

Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 4. Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel conduit,

or IMC before rising above the floor.

I. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible.

1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows

can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.

J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.

1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

K. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.

L. Terminations:

1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box.

2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

N. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.

O. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box


with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

P. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.

Q. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

R. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.


WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters, integral surge suppression units, and isolated-ground receptacles.

2. Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches. 3. Device wall plates. 4. Pin and sleeve connectors and receptacles. 5. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multi-outlet

assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.

D. Field quality-control test reports.



A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single manufacturer.


C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Wiring Devices:

a. Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary. b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. d. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. e. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.

2. Poke-Through, Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles:

a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. b. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. c. Square D/Groupe Schneider NA. d. Thomas & Betts Corporation. e. Wiremold Company (The).

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-596G, and UL 498.

B. Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: General-Duty grade.


C. Straight-Blade Receptacles: Hospital grade.

D. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, non-feed-through type, Heavy-Duty grade, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL 943. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch deep outlet box without an adapter.

E. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Straight blade, Heavy-Duty grade, duplex receptacle, with equipment grounding contacts connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap.

1. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated-ground receptacles. 2. Isolation Method: Integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable

parts.

F. TVSS Receptacles: Straight blade, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, with integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.

1. TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp level rating of 500 volts and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 140 J line to neutral, and 70 J line to ground and neutral to ground.

2. Active TVSS Indication: Visual only with light visible in face of device to indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service."

3. Receptacle Type: Heavy-Duty grade. 4. Identification: Distinctive marking on face of device to denote TVSS-type unit.

G. Industrial Heavy-Duty Pin and Sleeve Devices: Comply with IEC 309-1.

H. Hazardous (Classified) Location Receptacles: Comply with NEMA FB 11.

2.3 PENDANT CORD/CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector, NEMA WD 6, Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, Heavy-Duty grade.

1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip.

2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.

2.4 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.


2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.5 SWITCHES

A. Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20.

B. Snap Switches: General-Duty grade, quiet type.

C. Combination Switch and Receptacle: Both devices in a single gang unit with plaster ears and removable tab connector that permit separate or common feed connection.

1. Switch: 20 A, 120/277-V ac. 2. Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-15R.

D. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on/off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters.

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.4. Material for Wet Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in "wet locations."

2.7 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service outlet assembly.

1. Service Outlet Assembly, as detailed on the drawings. 2. Size: Selected to fit nominal cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness. 3. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly. 4. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused cored openings and reestablish fire rating of

floor.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70.


2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. TVSS Devices: Blue.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.

B. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' written instructions.

D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

E. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.

F. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 16 Section 16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:


1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements.

2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.


DISCONNECTS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16476 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 16476 - DISCONNECTS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Feeder and equipment disconnects. 2. Enclosed circuit breakers.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 16 Section "Fuses."

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for switches, circuit breakers, and accessories specified in this Section.

C. Descriptive data and time-current curves for protective devices and let-through current curves for those devices with current-limiting characteristics.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: All enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering enclosed switches and circuit breakers that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1. Fusible Switches:

a. Allen-Bradley Co. b. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. c. Crouse-Hinds Distribution Equipment.


d. Cutler-Hammer Products; Eaton Corp. e. Electrical Distribution and Control; General Electric Co. f. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. g. Square D Co.

2. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:

a. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. b. Crouse-Hinds Distribution Equipment. c. Distribution and Control (formerly Westinghouse Electric Co.). d. Cutler-Hammer Products; Eaton Corp. e. Electrical Distribution and Control; General Electric Co. f. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. g. Square D Co.

3. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground Fault Trip:

a. Crouse-Hinds Distribution Equipment. b. Distribution and Control (formerly Westinghouse Electric Co.). c. Electrical Distribution and Control; General Electric Co. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D Co.

2.02 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

A. Enclosed Non-fusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, motor-rated, handle lockable with 2 padlocks, visible blades.

B. Enclosed Fusible Switch, 800 Amperes and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, motor-rated, visible blades, clips to accommodate specified fuses, enclosure consistent with environment where located, handle lockable with 2 padlocks, and interlocked with cover in CLOSED position.

1. Minimum Fault Current Rating: 100,000 symmetrical rms amperes. 2. Operation: Manually opened and closed.

C. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, Type 1, unless specified or required otherwise to meet environmental conditions of installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

D. Above requirements apply to all disconnect switches, whether part of a motor combination starter or as a stand-alone device.

2.03 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Enclosed Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, handle lockable with 2 padlocks.

B. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated; interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current, 42,000 symmetrical rms amperes


minimum; with appropriate application listing when used for switching fluorescent lighting loads or heating, air conditioning, and refrigeration equipment.

C. Field-Adjustable Trips: Circuit breakers, 400 amperes and larger, with adjustable short time and continuous current settings.

D. Molded-Case Switch: Where indicated, molded-case circuit breaker without trip units.

E. Lugs: Mechanical lugs and power-distribution connectors for number, size, and material of conductors indicated.

F. Shunt Trip: Where indicated, 120 volts, 60 Hz.

G. Enclosure: NEMA AB 1, Type 1, unless specified or required otherwise to meet environmental conditions of installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed switches and circuit breakers in locations as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install enclosed switches and circuit breakers level and plumb.

C. Install wiring between enclosed switches and circuit breakers and control/indication devices.

D. Connect enclosed switches and circuit breakers and components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A.

E. Circuit breaker manufacturer shall provide recommended values for all adjustable circuit breakers, including short-time, long-time, instantaneous and ground fault pick-up settings. Settings shall be indicated with annotated, corresponding time-current curves and demonstrating coordination with downstream devices and load conductors.

3.02 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable enclosed switches and circuit breaker trip ranges as recommended by manufacturer, upon approval.

3.03 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches,


and abrasions.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.

B. Review data in the "Operating and Maintenance Manual." Refer to Division 1 Section "Project Closeout."

C. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect with at least 7 days' advance notice.


FUSES 16491 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 16491 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes cartridge fuses, rated 600 V and less, for use in switches, panelboards, switchboards, controllers, and motor-control centers; and spare fuse cabinets.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings for each fuse type indicated.

B. Product Data: Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

2. Let-through current curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current curves, coordination charts and tables, and related data. 4. Fuse size for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.

C. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information. If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses adjusted.

1. For each adjusted fuse, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

2. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

D. Maintenance Data: For tripping devices to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Source Limitations: Provide fuses from a single manufacturer.



C. Comply with NEMA FU 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40ºF or more than 100ºF, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with HVAC and refrigeration equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged in original cartons or containers and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: Quantity equal to 2 percent of each fuse type and size, but not fewer than 4 of each type and size.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper Industries, Inc.; Bussmann Div. 2. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. 3. Ferraz Corp. 4. General Electric Co.; Wiring Devices Div. 5. Gould Shawmut. 6. Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES


A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indicated; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage.

2.3 SPARE FUSE CABINET

A. Cabinet: Wall-mounted, 0.05-inch thick steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-coded cam lock and pull.

1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity minimum.

2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. 3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch high letters on exterior of door. 4. Fuse Pullers: For each size fuse.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

B. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Main Service: Class L, time delay.

B. Main Feeders: Class RK1, fast acting.

C. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.

D. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install spare fuse cabinet(s).

3.4 IDENTIFICATION


A. Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch.


INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts. 2. Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces. 3. Emergency lighting units. 4. Exit signs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor. Ratio of light output of a given lamp(s) operated by the subject ballast to the light output of the same lamp(s) when operated on an ANSI reference circuit.

B. CRI: Color rendering index.

C. CU: Coefficient of utilization.

D. LER: Luminaire efficiency rating, which is calculated according to NEMA LE 5. This value can be estimated from photometric data using the following formula:

1. LER is equal to the product of total rated lamp lumens times BF times luminaire efficiency, divided by input watts.

E. RCR: Room cavity ratio.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts.


3. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling fixtures. Furnish data required in "Submittals" Article in Division 15 Section 15870 "Outlets and Inlets."

4. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers and Grilles."

5. Lamps.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which lighting-fixture suspension systems will be attached. 3. Other items in finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Access panels.

4. Perimeter moldings.

E. Source quality-control test reports.

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace


components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.

B. Special Warranty for Fluorescent Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

1. Warranty Period: One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Lamps: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Ballasts: 1 for every 1000 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

2.2 FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL


A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

D. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

E. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is scheduled.

b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: A component of fixture assembly. Suppress conducted electromagnetic-interference as required by MIL-STD-461D. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.

2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS

A. Description: Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output. 2. Externally fused with slow-blow type rated between 2.65 and 3.0 times the line current.

B. Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Comply with NEMA C82.11. 2. Ballast Type: Instant starts, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Programmed Start: Ballasts with two-step lamp starting to extend life of frequently started

lamps. 4. Sound Rating: A. 5. Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 20 percent according to NEMA C82.11. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A.


7. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7. 9. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on

surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

C. Ballasts for compact lamps in recessed fixtures shall have the following features, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Type: Electronic. 2. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 3. Flicker: Less than 5 percent. 4. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7. 5. Electronic Ballast Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 6. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 7. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category A1 locations. 8. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.

D. Ballasts for compact lamps in nonrecessed fixtures shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 2. Ballast Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum. 3. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category A1 locations. 4. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.

2.4 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS

A. General: Comply with NEMA C82.4 and UL 1029. Shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Type: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22ºF, Minus 30ºC for single-lamp ballasts. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104ºF - 40ºC. 4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.

B. Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Automatically switches quartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. Automatically turns quartz lamp off when high-intensity-discharge lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output.

C. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture noise.

2.5 EXIT SIGNS

A. General: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.


B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: Light-emitting diodes, 70,000 hours minimum of rated lamp life.

2.6 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit factory mounted within fixture body. Comply with UL 924.

2.7 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

B. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated.

1. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 5 W, 250 initial lumens (minimum). 2. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 7 W, 400 initial lumens (minimum). 3. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 9 W, 600 initial lumens (minimum). 4. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 825 initial lumens (minimum). 5. T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 900 initial lumens (minimum). 6. T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 18 W, 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 7. T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 26 W, 1800 initial lumens (minimum).

2.8 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMPS

A. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, wattage and burning position as scheduled, CRI 65 (minimum), and color temperature 4000.

2.9 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 16 Section 16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.


D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated, 12 gage.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage.

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

H. Aircraft Cable Support: Use cable, anchorages, and intermediate supports recommended by fixture manufacturer.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Fixtures: Manufacturers' standard, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects. 2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide services of a qualified, independent testing and inspecting agency to factory test fixtures with ballasts and lamps; certify results for electrical ratings and photometric data.

B. Factory test fixtures with ballasts and lamps; certify results for electrical ratings and photometric data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.

B. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support and provide additional support for fixture from structure above. (See Item 4.)

1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.


4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

C. Suspended Fixture Support: As follows:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Continuous Rows: Suspend from cable.

D. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.

3.2 CONNECTIONS



A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.

C. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify normal transfer to emergency power source and retransfer to normal.

D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

E. Corroded Fixtures: During warranty period, replace fixtures that show any signs of corrosion.


EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 - 1 COM – Restroom Improvements – Maximo Gomez Park October 31, 2008 Wolfberg Alvarez & Partners

SECTION 16521 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts, but not mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.


1. Division 16 Section 16511 "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each luminaire, arranged in the order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Luminaire dimensions, effective projected area, details of attaching luminaires, accessories, and installation and construction details.

3. Luminaire materials. 4. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts. 5. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge lamps. 6. Electrical and energy-efficiency data for ballasts.

B. Shop Drawings: Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Coordination Drawings: Mounting and connection details, drawn to scale, for exterior luminaires with requirements specified in Division 2 Section "Lighting Poles and Standards."

E. Source quality-control test reports.

F. Field quality-control test reports.


G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in maintenance manuals.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. FMG Compliance: Fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FMG.

C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate exterior luminaires with mounting and wind load requirements in Division 2 Section "Lighting Poles and Standards."

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace luminaires or components of luminaires and lamps that fail in materials or workmanship; corrode; or fade, stain, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.

1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

a. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within twelve (12) months from date of Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the second twelve (12) months from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS



1. Lamps: Two (2) of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: Two (2) of each type and

rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.3. Ballasts: Two (2) of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 4. Globes and Guards: Two (2) of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one (1) of

each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL

A. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

C. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

D. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

F. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

G. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.


3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

I. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS

A. Ballasts shall be suitable for low-temperature environments.

1. Temperatures 0ºF and Higher: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0ºF starting temperature.

2. Temperatures minus 20ºF and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with high-output lamps.

3. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category A1 locations.

B. Ballasts for compact lamps shall be suitable for cold-weather starting and shall include the following:

1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 2. Ballast-Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum. 3. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category A1 locations.

2.4 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS

A. General: Comply with NEMA C82.4 and UL 1029. Shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Type: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22º F for single-lamp ballasts. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104º F. 4. Open-circuit operation will not reduce average life. 5. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current

ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.

B. Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Automatically switches quartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. Automatically turns quartz lamp off when high-intensity-discharge lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output.

2.5 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500, averaged rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated.

1. T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 18 W, 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 2. T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 26 W, 1800 initial lumens (minimum).


2.6 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMPS

A. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, wattage and burning position as scheduled, CRI 65 (minimum), and color temperature 4000.

2.7 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Field Painting Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match process and color of pole or support materials specified in Division 2 Section "Lighting Poles and Standards."

C. Factory-Painted Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Interior Surfaces: Apply one coat of bituminous paint on interior of pole, or otherwise treat to prevent corrosion.

3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As specified by Owner’s Representative.

D. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

a. Color: As specified by Owner’s Representative.

5. Gold Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A43 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, impregnated color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.


2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide services of a qualified, independent testing and inspecting agency to factory test luminaires with ballasts and lamps; certify results for isofootcandle curves, zonal lumen, average and minimum ratios, and electrical and energy-efficiency data for ballasts.

B. Factory test fixtures with ballasts and lamps; certify results for isofootcandle curves, zonal lumen, average and minimum ratios, and electrical and energy-efficiency data for ballasts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each fixture.

B. Luminaire Attachment: Fasten to indicated structural supports.

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.

3.2 CONNECTIONS



A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Tests and Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):

1. IESNA LM-5. 2. IESNA LM-50. 3. IESNA LM-52. 4. IESNA LM-64. 5. IESNA LM-72.

C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.
